JP7297600B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes games.

Patent Literature 1 describes a game machine having a so-called one-kind-two-kind game feature.

JP 2015-208334 A

In recent years, only similar gaming machines have been proposed, and novel gaming machines are desired.

Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a novel gaming machine.

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the problems described above. It should be noted that the following solutions and words in parentheses are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to these. Further, the present invention can be an invention that includes at least one of the invention-specifying matters shown in the following means for solving the problem. Furthermore, each of the matters specifying the invention shown in the following solutions can be converted into a higher-level concept by adding elements that limit the matters specifying the invention, or by deleting elements that limit the matters specifying the invention. .

Solution Means 1: The gaming machine of the present solution means comprises lottery element acquisition means for acquiring lottery elements related to a predetermined lottery, lottery element storage means capable of storing the lottery elements, and the predetermined lottery using the lottery elements. state transition means for allowing a transition from the first state to the second state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied; and if the state of the lottery element storage means is a special state, the The game machine is provided with an effect executing means for executing a common effect in the first state and the second state.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) Acquire lottery elements (special symbol jackpot random number, variation pattern determination random number, etc.) related to a predetermined lottery (special symbol lottery).
(2) Lottery element storage means capable of storing the lottery elements of (1) above is provided. The lottery elements can be stored, for example, up to a predetermined upper limit number (up to four or one per symbol).
(3) Execute a predetermined lottery using the lottery elements of (2) above.

(4) When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when the winning pattern corresponds to the transition to the time reduction state, when the winning pattern corresponds to the transition to the high probability state), it is possible to shift from the first state to the second state. (Make it possible to shift to an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state).

The first state (normal state) is preferably a state in which a predetermined condition is applied to the game.
Also, the second state (advantageous state) is preferably a state in which a condition more advantageous than the predetermined condition is applied. The second state is at least one of the high probability state (high probability of winning the special symbol lottery) or the shortened time state (high probability of winning the normal symbol lottery, electric chew support state, etc.) The state preferably includes two states.

(5) If the lottery element storage means in (2) above is in a special state (if the state of storage of the lottery element is in a special state, the number of memories related to the second special symbol is a specified number or more (for example, 1 or more) If so), it is possible to execute a common effect (a effect with common contents) in the first state and the second state.
The common effect is preferably a mode using the same background image. The reason for this is that even if the second state ends, it is possible to strongly give the player the impression that the mode being executed in the second state continues.
Note that the common effect may be a completely common effect, or may be a effect in which at least some elements (for example, background images, modes, stages, BGM, appearing characters, etc.) are common.

According to this solving means, if the state of the lottery element storage means is a special state, the common performance can be executed in the first state and the second state, so that the game state changes from the second state to the first state. , the player can be given the impression that the second state continues. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

Solution 2: In any one of the above-described solution means, the gaming machine of the present solution means is such that if the state of the lottery element storage means is not the special state, the first state and the first state This game machine is characterized by being able to execute a non-common performance in two states.

In the present solution means, if the state of the lottery element storage means is not a special state (if the number of memories related to the second special symbol is less than the specified number (for example, 0)), in the first state and the second state, non- A common performance (a performance with different contents) can be executed.

According to this solving means, a common effect is executed or a non-common effect is executed according to the state of the lottery element storage means. It can give you motivation to save. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a game board unit alone. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning device 31. FIG. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning device 31. FIG. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram showing various electronic devices installed in the pachinko machine. FIG. 11 is a flowchart (1/2) showing a first procedure example of reset start processing; FIG. 2 is a flowchart (2/2) showing a first procedure example of reset start processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a second procedure example of reset start processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of in-preparation processing; FIG. 7 is a flowchart specifically showing an example of a procedure of power failure occurrence check processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of interrupt management processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of switch input event processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a 1st special design memory|storage update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a 2nd special design memory|storage update process. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of effect determination processing at the time of acquisition; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a configuration example of a special symbol game process. It is a flow chart showing a procedure example of special symbol variation pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of special design storage area shift processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the stop design selection table at the time of a 1st special design big hit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the stop design selection table at the time of a 2nd special design big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop design selection table at the time of a 2nd special design small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a process during a special design stop display. It is a figure which shows the list of a fluctuation pattern table. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortening state. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortening state. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the time shortening state. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation after the jackpot game from the time shortening state is the second special symbol. 6 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of display output management processing; It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a variable prize-winning apparatus management process. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of a special winning opening opening pattern setting process; It is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table classified by design at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. It is a figure which shows an example of an opening pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a special prize opening opening-and-closing operation process. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of a second big winning opening opening/closing operation process; 9 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of specific area opening/closing operation processing; 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of processing when passing through a specific area; It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table classified by design at the time of passing through a specific area. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a 1st big winning a prize opening-and-closing operation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a special winning opening closing process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for termination processing; It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special design changes in normal mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a game flow developed when the second special symbol changes in the drive mode in the time shortening state; It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special design fluctuates in the drive mode of a non-reduction state. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special design changes in the animal mode of a non-time reduction state. FIG. 11 is a continuous diagram showing an example of effect images corresponding to variable display and stop display of special symbols (1/2); It is a continuation diagram showing an example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol (2/2). It is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the ready-to-win effect executed at the time of the big hit (1/3). It is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the ready-to-win effect executed at the time of the big hit (2/3). It is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the ready-to-win effect executed at the time of the big hit (3/3). It is a continuation diagram partially showing an example of an effect during a big role executed during a big hit game (1/2). It is a continuation diagram partially showing an example of an effect during a big win executed during a big hit game (2/2). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect of the drive mode (1/3). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect of the drive mode (2/3). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect of the drive mode (3/3). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect when the second special symbol is changed in the drive mode in the non-time reduction state (1/2). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect when the second special symbol is changed in the drive mode in the non-time reduction state (2/2). FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an overview of drive modes; FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation at the time of the deviation fluctuation|variation of a 1st special design being performed in the memory digestion area. It is a diagram showing the difference between the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected in the memory consumption interval and the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected in the immediate stop prevention interval. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game regarding a game state and a shooting direction. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of production|presentation control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of operation memory production|presentation management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of production|presentation design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of production|presentation design change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a fluctuation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of mode production|presentation management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of processing during a production|presentation design stop display. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of processing when the variable winning device is activated. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of processing when the variable winning device is activated at the time of the big hit. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of processing when the small hit variable winning device is activated. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of other production processing during time saving and simulated time saving. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of drum unit effect management processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of transition of a special variation pattern for measures against immediate termination of continuous villa state. It is a diagram showing a transition example of a special variation pattern in consideration of irregular hitting.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as "pachinko machine") 1. As shown in FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. The pachinko machine 1 uses game balls as game media. In the game on the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and the benefits (profits) that the player enjoys as a result of the game are, for example, the game It can be converted into a game value based on the number of balls. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG.

[Overall configuration of game machine]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4 and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. An integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is positioned on the rear side (deep side) of the integrated door unit 4 , and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7 .

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. It is fixed using In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the upper and lower short sides, and metal is used for the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at its lower position. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and each of these operates in an opening/closing manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening/closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends vertically along the left end of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge of the inner frame assembly 7 (left edge in FIG. 2) as viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, locking devices (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (rear sides) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2, respectively. As shown in FIG. 1, when the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side locks the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the lock. It disables the opening of 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. As shown in FIG. For example, when the manager of the game arcade inserts the special key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 is actuated and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the integrated door unit 4 is unlocked while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, so that the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integral door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game parlor can remove obstacles such as clogged balls in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4 . The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7, for example, with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side. The integrated door unit 4 has a vertically long circular window 4a formed in the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut to match the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the rear side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a can be visually recognized by the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integral door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface to allow the game balls to flow down.

The receiving tray unit 6 has a shape projecting from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper tray 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. In the upper tray 6b, game balls lent to the player (rental balls) and game balls obtained by winning prizes (prize balls) can be stored. Further, the tray unit 6 is formed with a lower tray 6c below the upper tray 6b. The lower tray 6c stores the game balls that have been put out while the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, and the game balls borrowed by the player are sent from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls to the receiving tray unit 6 (upper tray 6b or lower tray). Dispensed onto a plate 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged in the lending operation unit 14. - 特許庁When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted into a card unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined number of points (for example, 5 points) (For example, 125) game balls are rented. For this reason, a frequency display section (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation section 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the card unit is displayed on this frequency display section. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium with remaining points. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, but may be a cash machine (a model not connected to a card unit).

On the upper surface of the receiving tray unit 6, an upper tray ball removing button 6d is provided in front of the upper tray 6b, and a lower tray ball removing lever 6e is provided in the center before the lower tray 6c. is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper tray 6b to flow down to the lower tray 6c by, for example, pressing the upper tray ball removal button 6d. Further, the player can drop and eject the game balls stored in the lower tray 6c by sliding the lower tray ball extraction lever 6e leftward, for example. The ejected game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right portion of the tray unit 6 . The player operates the grip unit 16 to operate the shooting control board set 174 and can shoot (hit) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball shooting device). The shot game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (no reference numerals in the figure), etc. are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmills. The structure of the game area 8a (board surface) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Composition of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for presentation. Among them, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48 , and the upper right illumination unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50 . In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integral door unit 4 so as to be continuous below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49. These glass frame decoration lamps 52 are It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the receiving tray unit 6 so as to wrap around. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (no reference numeral).

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 described above perform effects by, for example, light emission from built-in LEDs (lighting, blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, on the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49 are provided with glass frame top speakers 54 and 55, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2 . These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voices, etc. (general sound) to execute production.

In addition, in the center of the tray unit 6, an effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means) is installed in front of the upper tray 6b. The effect switching button 45 is, for example, a combination of a push-type circular button and a rotary jog ring (jog dial) around it. The player presses or rotates the effect switching button 45 to switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), or to perform some effect (for example, during the fluctuation of the pattern or during the jackpot game). It is possible to generate a notice effect, a probability change promotion effect, a promotion effect during a big role, etc.).

[Composition of the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 includes a power control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) that constitute the power system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed. Electronic devices will be further described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 7).

The dispensing device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference numerals). In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment path (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are led to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game balls delivered from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

The external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). Various external information signals (e.g. prize ball information, door opening information, pattern confirmation number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) representing the progress state, maintenance state, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) necessary for the pachinko machine 1 to operate, for example, by being connected to a power supply (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of the game arcade. The ground wire 166 is also connected to a ground terminal installed in the island equipment to secure the grounding of the pachinko machine 1 .

[Board composition]
FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. In the game area 8a, a relatively large production unit 40 is arranged at its central position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part centering on the production unit 40. - 特許庁In addition, in the game area 8a, around the production unit 40, there are a middle starting winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, normal winning openings 22, 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device. 31 etc. are distributed and installed. Among them, the middle start winning opening 26 is located in the center of the lower part of the game area 8a. A starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from the top in the right portion (so-called right-handed region) of the game region 8a. It is

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the starting gate 20 in the process of flowing down, or enters (wins) the medium start winning opening 26, the normal winning openings 22, 25, or the opening operation. The variable start winning device 28 at the time, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. Here, there is a possibility that a game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a enters the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22.例文帳に追加A game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a passes through the starting gate 20, enters the normal winning hole 25, enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation, or enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation. There is a possibility that the ball will land in the first variable prize winning device 30 or the ball will land in the second variable prize winning device 31 during the opening operation. The game ball that entered the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning openings 22 and 25, the variable starting winning apparatus 28, the first variable winning apparatus 30, and the second variable winning apparatus 31 It is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in a plate material, a transparent plate, etc.).

In the present embodiment, the variable starting prize winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a win mode), and accordingly the entry into the right starting prize opening 28b. Enables balls (usually motorized accessories). The variable start-up winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening/closing members 28a, and these opening/closing members 28a reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a solenoid (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 3, the left and right opening/closing members 28a are in the closed position with their tips facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the ball into the right start winning hole 28b (a game ball is difficult to enter). There is no gap that can be made). On the other hand, when the variable starting prize winning device 28 operates, the left and right opening/closing members 28a are displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width is expanded left and right to open the right starting prize winning port 28b. During this time, the variable starting prize winning device 28 is in a state in which the game ball can enter, and can cause the ball to enter the right starting prize winning port 28b (variable starting prize winning means). In addition, at this time, the opening/closing member 28a also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b. In addition, the arrangement of the obstructing nails installed in the game board unit 8 basically does not impede the downflow of the game balls toward the variable starting prize winning device 28 (the right starting winning port 28b when opened). However, the game ball does not necessarily enter the variable starting prize winning device 28 (right starting prize winning port 28b) at the time of opening operation, and the ball enters at random.

In addition, the variable start winning device 28 is a condition that is difficult to be satisfied in a non-time shortening state (predetermined game state), and a predetermined condition that is more likely to be satisfied in a time shortening state (advantageous game state) than in a non-time shortening state. When the operation condition (the condition that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode and the normal electric accessory is opened for a long time) is not satisfied, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b. On the other hand, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the state is shifted to an easy-to-enter state in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b than the difficult-to-enter state. The variable start winning device 28 short-opens (opens for 0.1 second) when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the winning mode in the non-time shortening state, and stops and displays the normal symbols in the winning mode in the time shortening state. If so, long open (open for 1.0 to 6.0 seconds).

The first variable winning device 30 operates when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win, or when a game ball passes through a specific area during a small win game). , to allow the ball to enter the first big winning hole 30b (special electric accessory, special winning event generating means). The first variable winning device 30 has, for example, one opening/closing member 30a. The opening/closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position to the open position by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). As shown in the drawing, the opening/closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the first big prize winning port 30b (the first big prize winning port 30b is closed). is. When the first variable prize winning device 30 operates, the opening/closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall rightward with its lower edge portion as a hinge, thereby opening the first big prize winning port 30b (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which game balls can flow in, and can generate an event in which the ball enters the first big winning hole 30b. At this time, the opening/closing member 30a also functions as a member that guides the inflow of game balls into the first big winning hole 30b. The arrangement of the obstructing nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically such that it does not extremely hinder the flow of the game balls toward the first variable prize winning device 30 (the first big prize winning port 30b when activated). However, the game ball does not always enter the first variable winning device 30 when activated, and the ball enters at random.

The second variable winning device 31 operates when a special condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a small win) to enable the ball to enter the second big winning hole 31b ( Special electric accessory, second special winning event generating means). Incidentally, the second variable winning device 31 may operate when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win.

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged on the right side of the effect unit 40, and has one opening/closing member 31a, for example. The above-mentioned first variable winning device 30 employs a device in which the opening/closing member 30a falls to the right (one-blade tulip type attacker). Adopts a type of device that slides inside the board (sliding attacker). The opening/closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface, for example, by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening/closing member 31a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player side. is difficult to enter (the second big winning hole 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable prize winning device 31 operates, the opening/closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board to open the second big prize winning port 31b (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state in which it is not difficult for game balls to flow in, and an event of a ball entering the second big winning hole 31b can be generated.

[Specific area]
Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a specific area 31x is provided. The specific area 31x is an area where it is difficult for game balls to pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in a closed state, and when the second variable winning device 31 is in an open state, the specific region slide member 31c is This is an area through which a game ball can pass when it is drawn into the inside of the board surface. Details of the second variable winning device 31 will be described later.

Also, although not particularly shown, the second variable winning device 31 (opening/closing member 31a) may be provided with a game ball rolling speed reduction section that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball. The game ball rolling speed reduction portion is formed by making the inclination of the opening/closing member 31a gentle, or by forming projections protruding alternately at positions on the opening/closing member 31a through which the game ball passes to cause the game ball to advance in a zigzag manner. can be realized. As a result, many game balls can enter the second variable winning device 31 during the small winning game.

In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and game balls that do not win a prize are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32. - 特許庁In addition, the middle start winning opening 26, normal winning openings 22, 25, variable starting winning opening 28 (right starting winning opening 28b), first variable winning opening 30 (first large winning opening 30b), second variable winning opening 31 ( All the game balls driven into the game area 8a, including the game balls that entered the second big winning hole 31b (specific area), are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8.例文帳に追加The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

4 and 5 are diagrams showing the details of the second variable winning device 31. FIG.
The second variable prize winning device 31 has a second big prize winning opening 31b arranged below a sliding opening/closing member 31a. The interior of the second big prize winning opening 31b is inclined downward to the left, and a passage extends downward at the left end. A second count switch 85 is arranged in the downwardly extending passage, and the second count switch 85 counts the number of game balls entering the second variable winning device 31 .

Then, the passage extending downward is divided into two routes at the tip. One of the first passages 31d extends downward, and the other of the second passages 31e branches to the left.
A specific region slide member 31c is arranged in the first passage 31d, and a specific region 31x is arranged downstream of the first passage 31d. A specific area switch (not shown) is arranged inside the specific area 31x.
On the other hand, no special member is arranged in the second passage 31e, and a discharge hole 31y is arranged downstream of the second passage 31e.

The specific area slide member 31c operates when a special condition is satisfied (after the first time has elapsed and before the second time has elapsed since the operation of the second variable winning device 31), and the specific area 31x is operated. To allow passage of game balls. The specific area slide member 31c slides along the front-rear direction of the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a specific area solenoid (not shown), for example. For example, after the first time has passed, 0.2 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated, and after the second time has passed, 1.8 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 has been activated. After the passage of time.

When the specific area solenoid is in the OFF state, the specific area slide member 31c blocks the first passage 31d, making it difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 31x. On the other hand, when the specific area solenoid is turned on, the specific area slide member 31c is pulled inside the board surface, so that the game ball can easily pass through the specific area 31x.

Next, the operation of the second variable winning device 31 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 4A, the sliding opening/closing member 31a is drawn into the inside of the board surface, and the game ball enters the second big winning hole 31b. In the illustrated example, four game balls are advancing toward the second big winning hole 31b. Here, it is the state immediately before the first game ball is detected by the second count switch 85 .

As shown in FIG. 4B, the first game ball has reached the specific area slide member 31c. The second and third game balls are advancing toward the second count switch 85. - 特許庁The fourth game ball is about to enter the second big winning hole 31b.

As shown in FIG. 4(C), at this time point, the specific area slide member 31c is not pulled inward (because it is not in operation), so the first game ball is the specific area slide. The direction of travel is changed to the left by the member 31c, and travels through the second passage 31e. In this case, the first game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

As shown in (D) in FIG. 5, it is assumed that the specific-area slide member 31c is drawn inside the board surface at this time (during operation). In this case, the second game ball passes through the front side of the specific area slide member 31c and proceeds to the first passage 31d. Then, the second game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 5(E), the third game ball also passes through the front side of the specific area slide member 31c and advances to the first passage 31d. In this case, the third game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in (F) in FIG. 5, at this point, the operation of the specific area slide member 31c is completed, and the specific area slide member 31c protrudes forward from the board surface. In this case, the fourth game ball is guided to the left by the specific area slide member 31c and proceeds to the second passage 31e. And the fourth game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

FIG. 6 is a front view showing an enlarged part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a).
In the game board unit 8, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 (normal symbol display means) and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a are provided at the lower right position in the window 4a, and a first special symbol display device 34 (second 1 symbol display means), a second special symbol display device 35 (second symbol display means), a first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and a game state display device 38 are provided.

Among them, the normal design display device 33 alternately lights two lamps (LEDs), for example, to variably display the normal design, and stops displaying the normal design by lighting or extinguishing the lamp. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays the number of memories of 0 to 4 by a combination of extinguishing, lighting, and blinking of two lamps (LED), for example. For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are turned off, the stored number is displayed as 0, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a stored number is displayed as 1, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. The number of memories is displayed as 2, the number of memories is 3 in the display mode in which one lamp is blinking and the other lamp is lit, and the number of memories is 4 in the display mode in which both lamps are blinking. For example, to display an individual. Although two lamps (LED) are used here, four lamps (LED) may be used to form the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

Each time a game ball passes through the starting gate 20, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to a display mode after incrementing one by one in the sense of memorizing the passage that triggers the operation lottery. (up to 4), and with the passage as a trigger, the display mode changes to the display mode after the decrease by 1 each time the variation of the normal symbol is started. In this embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the starting gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start to change (at the time of stop display). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the normal symbol variation has not yet started at that time.

In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 can display the fluctuation state and the stop state of the special symbols by, for example, a 7-segment LED (with dots) (symbol display means, first pattern display means, second pattern display means). In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, circularly).

In addition, the first special symbol working memory lamp 34a displays the number of memories of 0 to 4 (memory number display means ). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are turned off, the stored number is displayed as 0, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a stored number is displayed as 1, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinking. The number of memories is displayed as 2, the number of memories is displayed as 3 in a display mode in which one lamp is blinking and the other lamp is lit, and the number of memories is displayed in a display mode in which both lamps are blinking. 4 are displayed, and so on.

On the other hand, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a displays one memory number (memory number display means) by a display mode composed of a combination of turning off or lighting one lamp (LED), for example. For example, when one lamp is turned off, the stored number is 0, and when one lamp is turned on, the stored number is 1.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a changes to a display mode after incrementing one by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26, it is remembered that a ball has entered. (up to 4), and each time the special symbol starts to change with the entry ball as a trigger, it changes to the display mode after the decrease by one. In addition, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, when a game ball enters the variable starting prize winning device 28 (right starting prize winning port 28b), changes to the display mode after the increase in the sense of memorizing that the ball has entered. It changes (up to one), and when the variation of the special symbol is started with the entrance ball as a trigger, it changes to the display mode after the decrease. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the first special symbol (first symbol) is already in a state where variation can be started (at the time of stop display). The display mode does not change even if a game ball enters the medium start winning hole 26.例文帳に追加In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where the second special symbol (second symbol) can already start to change (at the time of stop display). Even if a game ball enters (the right starting winning hole 28b), the display mode does not change. That is, the memory number (maximum 4 or maximum 1) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is still the first special symbol or the second special symbol variation is started at that time It represents the number of times the ball was not entered.

The gaming state display device 38 includes, for example, six LEDs respectively corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the firing position designation display lamp 38f. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, the second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are mounted on one integrated display board 89 and attached to the game board unit 8. - 特許庁

[Other configurations of the game board: see Fig. 3]
The effect unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and has various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside. The decorative parts 40b and 40c enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by their three-dimensional shape, and can perform dramatic actions by emitting transmitted light from, for example, built-in light emitters (LEDs, etc.). . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed in the inner upper part of the production unit 40, and the liquid crystal display 42 has a production pattern (main pattern) corresponding to a special pattern, a fourth pattern, Various effect images including a memory marker (holding display) are displayed. In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the features of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of its board surface (the design of the cell board not shown) and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40 .

Furthermore, a drum unit 200 is installed inside and below the production unit 40 .
The drum unit 200 has a left reel 201, a middle reel 202, and a right reel 203, and each reel displays pseudo performance symbols (7 symbols, panda symbols, cherry symbols, etc.). For example, when 7 symbols of the same color are displayed on the middle line, which is the active line, it means that a big hit has been obtained in the special symbol lottery. Each reel of the drum unit 200 is a movable body movable at a plurality of movable speeds.

A ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left side edge of the effect unit 40. As shown in FIG. The ball guide passage 40d passes through the back side of the production unit 40 and is connected to the lower rolling stage 40e. The ball guide passage 40d is opened diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the interior and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, on which the game ball can freely roll in the horizontal direction. The game ball rolling on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided to the ball discharge path 40k from the rolling stage 40e easily flows into the middle starting winning opening 26 directly below it. .

In addition, inside the upper center of the production unit 40, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) (not shown) is attached together with a movable body 40f for production (for example, a heart-shaped ornament). The rendering movable body 40f can execute rendering involving the action of a tangible object, in addition to the rendering using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the rendering by the light emitting device. Such an effect using the movable body 40f can exert appealing power different from the effect using a two-dimensional image.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices installed in the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of the control operation, and this main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. there is The main controller 70 is incorporated in the main control board unit 170 described above.

In addition, the main control unit 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central processing unit, is mounted. RWM) 76 or the like is integrated as an LSI. The main controller 70 is also equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77 . Of these, the random number generator 75 is for generating a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for judging the jackpot of the special symbol lottery or the winning judgment of the normal symbol lottery. is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77 . In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input/output (I/O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter/timer circuit (CTC), and the like. Mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or an inner layer portion).

The starting gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting passage of a game ball. In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a middle start winning opening 26, a variable starting winning apparatus 28, a middle starting winning opening switch 80 and a right starting winning opening corresponding to the first variable winning apparatus 30 and the second variable winning apparatus 31, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84 and a second count switch 85 are provided. Each starting winning prize port switch 80, 82 is for detecting winning of a game ball to the starting winning prize port 26 and the variable starting prize winning device 28 (right starting prize winning port 28b). The first count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of game balls into the first variable winning device 30 (the first big winning opening 30b) and counting the number. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the winning of game balls to the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning opening 31b) and counting the number.

In addition, a specific area switch 83 is provided corresponding to the specific area 31x. A specific area switch 83 is provided at a position corresponding to the specific area 31x inside the second big winning hole 31b, and the specific area switch 83 detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x.

Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the winning of game balls into the normal winning openings 22 and 25 . Here, a configuration using a common winning opening switch 86 for all the normal winning openings 22 and 25 is taken as an example, but for example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the winning opening on the left side A switch 86 detects winning of a game ball to the normal winning ports 22 and 25 positioned on the left side of the board, and a right winning port switch 86 detects winning of a game ball to the normal winning port 25 positioned on the right side of the board. may be

In any case, winning detection signals and passing detection signals of these switches 80, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input/output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in this embodiment, the winning detection signal and passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the specific area switch 83, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the winning opening switch 86 are The signals are transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with wiring patterns, connection terminals, and the like for relaying the winning detection signals.

The above-described normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The display operation of the status display device 38 is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72 . The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals to these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display substrate 89 via the panel relay terminal board 87 .

In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a first large winning opening solenoid corresponding to the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31 and the specific area 31x, respectively. 90, a second big winning opening solenoid 97 and a specific area solenoid 99 are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97 and 99 are operated (excited) based on control signals from the main control CPU 72, and the variable starting prize winning device 28, the first variable prize winning device 30, the second variable prize winning device 31 and the specific area 31x, respectively. open and close the Control signals for these solenoids 88 , 90 , 97 and 99 are also transmitted from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal plate 87 .

In addition, a glass frame open switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4 and a plastic frame open switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7 . When the integrated door unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame unit 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When detecting the open state of the integrated door unit 4 or the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (special privilege providing means). This payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and this payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI integrated with a CPU core (not shown) and semiconductor memories such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98. It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) and a payout device board 100 are installed in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172. The payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. there is The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays out the indicated number of game balls from the prize ball case. let out The paid out game balls are sent to the receiving tray unit 6 through the payout channel in the channel unit 173 .

In addition, for example, a payout road ball disconnect switch 104 is installed at the upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at the downstream position of the payout motor 102 . Each time the payout motor 102 is driven to actually pay out the prize balls, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100 . Also, when the ball runs out at the upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100 . The payout device board 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100 .

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full tank switch 161, for example, inside the lower tray 6c (at the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The actually paid out prize balls (game balls) are discharged to the upper tray 6b through the flow path unit 173, but when the upper tray 6b is filled with game balls, more game balls are dispensed. It flows into the lower plate 6c as described above. Furthermore, when the lower tray 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is thereby turned on, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball motions even if a prize ball instruction command is received from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of prize balls that have not been paid out in the RAM 98.例文帳に追加The memory in the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, so even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. .

Also, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. - 特許庁Also, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6 . The firing control board 108, the firing solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the aforementioned firing control board set 174. Of these, the firing control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the firing solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among them, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation to feed the game balls stored in the receiving tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined shooting position within the launcher case. In addition, the shooting solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the shooting position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. In addition, the shooting interval of game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls per minute).

On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114 and a firing stop switch . Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Also, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (firing handle) from a change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal therefor. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) according to the player's operation.

A firing relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the receiving tray unit 6, and each signal from the firing lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the firing stop switch 116 is transmitted via the firing relay terminal plate 118 to the firing control board 108. sent to. A drive signal from the firing control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the firing relay terminal plate 118 . When the player operates the firing handle, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength of hitting the game ball is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. do. In addition, a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the shooting relay terminal plate 118, and when the above card unit is not connected to this game ball lending device connection terminal plate 120, similarly shooting The drive circuit on control board 108 stops driving firing solenoid 110 .

Further, the tray unit 6 incorporates a frequency display board 122 and a lending/returning switch board 123 . Of these, the frequency display substrate 122 is provided with the above-described frequency display unit indicator (three-digit seven-segment LED). In addition, the lending and returning switch board 123 is mounted with switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the returning button 12, respectively. And it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the card unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120 . In addition, from the card unit, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120 . A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display substrate 122 drives a display based on the frequency signal to numerically display the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when no valuable medium is inserted into the card unit or when the remaining points of the inserted valuable medium become 0, the display circuit of the point display board 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (valuable medium ) can also be displayed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a performance control device 124 (computer for controlling performance) as a control configuration. This performance control device 124 controls the performance accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 . The performance control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which a performance control CPU 126, which is a central processing unit, is mounted. The production control CPU 126 incorporates a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. Note that the effect control device 124 is provided at a position on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and covered by the back cover unit 178 .

The performance control device 124 is equipped with an input/output driver and various peripheral ICs (not shown), as well as a lamp driving circuit 132 and a sound driving circuit 134 . The production control CPU 126 controls the production based on the production command sent from the main control CPU 72, and gives commands to the lamp drive circuit 132 and the sound drive circuit 134 to light the various lamps 46 to 52 and the board lamp 53. Also, processing for actually outputting sound effects, voices, etc. from the speakers 54 , 55 , 56 is performed.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via a communication harness (not shown), for example. However, communication between them is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. In addition, the communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and each driver IC (I / O) A serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration.

The lamp drive circuit 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown). ) to manage its operation such as light emission and blinking. In addition to the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50 and 52, the various lamps include a board surface lamp 53 installed in the game board unit 8 for decoration and presentation. The board lamp 53 corresponds to the LED built in the effect unit or the LED built in the variable starting prize winning device 28, the first variable prize winning device 30, the second variable prize winning device 31, and the like. Here, an example in which the glass-framed decorative lamp 52 is connected to the glass-framed decorative board 136 is given. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp driving circuit 132 through the substrate.

The acoustic drive circuit 134 is a sound generator containing, for example, a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, etc. (not shown). to output sound.

In this embodiment, a glass-framed electric board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the driving signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the sound drive circuit 134 are sent to various lamps 46 via the glass-framed electric board 136. 52 and speakers 54, 55 and 56. Further, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame electric decoration board 136 , and when the player operates the effect switching button 45 , the contact signal is sent to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame electric decoration board 136 . is entered. Here, an example in which the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass-framed decorative board 136 is given. good too. In addition, a panel illumination board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8 , and a movable body motor 57 is connected to the panel illumination board 138 in addition to the board surface lamp 53 . The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via, for example, a link mechanism (not shown). A driving signal from the lamp driving circuit 132 is applied to the board surface lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57 via the panel illumination board 138 . Note that the movable body motor 57 may be a solenoid.

[drum unit]
A drum unit 200 is also connected to the performance control device 124 .
The drum unit 200 includes a left reel 201, a middle reel 202, and a right reel 203 which are coaxially arranged.
The left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 are each formed in an annular shape, and a reel belt having a plurality of pseudo performance symbols arranged in a row at intervals is wound around the reel. . The left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 have a rotation axis at the center thereof, and can be rotated or reversely rotated around the rotation axis.

Further, the drum unit 200 is provided with a stepping motor (not shown) corresponding to each reel (hereinafter also simply referred to as a motor) and a position detection mechanism (not shown) corresponding to each reel. The position detection mechanism may be arranged inside the stepping motor or may be arranged outside the stepping motor. The position detection mechanism can be composed of, for example, a light shielding plate and a photosensor.

The stepping motor is driven by a drum unit controller (driver, IC) (not shown) that controls the drum unit 200 . The drum unit control device drives each reel according to movable body data transmitted from the effect control device 124 . Further, the drum unit control device transmits a detection signal to the effect control device 124 in response to detection of the position of each reel (for example, origin position) detected by the position detection mechanism.

Based on the detection signal transmitted from the drum unit control device, the effect control device 124 generates movable body data to be transmitted to the stepping motor corresponding to each reel, and controls the operation of each reel.

The stepping motor is a motor that alternately repeats 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation to drive each reel (movable body) (1-2 phase excitation drive). A coil 4) is included.

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8 , and the display screen thereof can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8 . In addition, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and this inverter board 158 generates AC power applied to the backlight of the liquid crystal display 42 (for example, a cold cathode tube). Furthermore, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation of the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. FIG. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 as a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 as a display processor is mounted. Among them, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 are integrated together with a processor core (not shown). A part of the storage area of the VRAM 156 can be used as a frame buffer.

The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program relating to the control of the effect, and the effect control CPU 126 executes control of the effect according to this program. Control of effects includes control of effects using various lamps 46 to 53 and speakers 54, 55, 56 as described above, as well as control of effects by image display using liquid crystal display 42. . The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives this transmits a specific image for effect based on the basic information. Control the display.

The display control CPU 146 outputs further detailed control signals to the VDP 152 . The VDP 152 having received this accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads the necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156 . Furthermore, the VDP 152 develops the image data on the VRAM 156 into a frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time), and based on the image data buffered here, each pixel (full-color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is individually displayed. to drive.

In addition, a power control unit 162 (power control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7 . This power supply control unit 162 incorporates a switching power supply circuit, and when it takes in external power (for example, AC 24V, etc.) from the island equipment through the power cord 164, it can generate necessary power (for example, DC +34V, +12V, etc.). The power generated by the power control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70 , the payout control device 92 , the performance control device 124 and the inverter board 158 . Further, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the card unit via the terminal board 120 for lending equipment such as game balls. Low-voltage power (for example, DC +5 V) for logic is generated by a power supply IC (three-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded to the island facility through the ground wire 166 as described above.

The external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are sent to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. is output to the outside from The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72 ) and payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94 ) can output external information signals to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160 . Signals output from the external terminal board 160 are counted, for example, by a hall computer (not shown) of the game arcade. In addition, although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 .

The above is an example of the configuration relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1 . Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main controller 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts reset start processing. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved at the time of the previous power shutdown, or by clearing the backup information. This process is for Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for ensuring stable game operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjustment of the initial state.

8 and 9 are flowcharts showing a first procedure example of the reset start process. Each procedure of the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described below.

Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector type interrupt mode (mode 2) and modifies the default RST type interrupt mode (mode 0). As a result, the main control CPU 72 can thereafter refer to any address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the specified interrupt handler.

Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a reset standby process here. This process secures a certain amount of waiting time (for example, about several thousand milliseconds) at the time of reset start (for example, turning on the power), and checks the main power interruption detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the main power interruption detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power failure detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitor IC, which is a peripheral device. When the input of the main power interruption detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the processing from the beginning. As a result, it is possible to protect the system even if the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly turned on and off within a short period of time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S104: Next, the main control CPU72 permits access to the work area of the RAM76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted thereafter.

Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 initializes the mask register to set the interrupt mask. Specifically, a value that enables the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to an input signal from a RAM clear switch (not shown) to confirm whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switched ON). If the RAM clear switch has not been operated (No), then step S107 is executed.

Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether the backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup was successfully completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, "A55AH") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

Step S108: The main control CPU72 performs a sum check on the backup information in the RAM76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (user work area including use-prohibited area and stack area) except for the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the sum check result is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, "0000H").
Step S110: Also, the main control CPU 72 clears the command that was waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power failure occurred.

Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes effect control return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the effect control device 124 a return command (for example, model designation command, special symbol probability state designation command, effect command when the number of working memories is increased, effect command when the number of working memories is decreased, number of cuts counter command, special game state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the effect control device 124 changes the effect state that was being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown (for example, internal probability state, display mode of the effect pattern, effect display mode of the working memory number, sound output content, various lamps light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the game state that was being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown (for example, the display mode of special symbols, the internal probability state, working memory contents, various flag states, random number update state, etc.). Also, the main control CPU 72 restores the value of the PC register that was backed up.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (step S106: Yes), if the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or if the backup information is not normal (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the storage contents of the RAM 76 other than the prohibited area. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents thereof are erased.
Step S114: The main control CPU72 also initializes the RAM76.

Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes effect control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU72 outputs a command (a command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after initial setting.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes payout control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command to the payout control device 92 to start paying out prize balls.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing to initialize the CTC (counter/timer circuit) which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and also sets an interrupt count value (eg 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when the next CTC interrupt occurs, the main control CPU 72 can continue processing from the program address of the backed-up PC register.

After executing the above procedure in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 9 (connection symbol A→A).

Steps S118 and S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interrupts, and then executes power failure check processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power interruption detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power interruption (drop in drive voltage). When a power cutoff occurs, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffers corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the big winning opening solenoid 90, etc., and the entire work area of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. and store the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value (for example, "A55AH") in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops processing (NOP). On the other hand, if power shutdown does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. It should be noted that there is a well-known example of programming that causes the CPU to execute such processing when power failure occurs as non-maskable interrupt (NMI) processing.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, various random numbers (for example, jackpot design random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) except for the jackpot determination random numbers (hardware random numbers) and the hit determination random numbers corresponding to normal symbols (hardware random numbers) is generated programmatically. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 13). ) is changed. The initial value update random number is used to randomly change this initial value, and in step S120, the initial value update random number is updated. The reason why step S120 is executed after prohibiting interrupts in step S118 is that the same processing is executed in another interrupt management processing (step S202 in FIG. 13). ) is to prevent As described above, in this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number and the winning determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update period thereof is faster than the timer interrupt period (eg, several ms). (for example, several μs), there is no need to update the initial values of the jackpot determination random number and the winning determination random number.

Steps S121, S122: The main control CPU 72 permits interrupts and executes random number update processing. The random numbers updated in this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to determination of winning types (hit types) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 13). The content of the interrupt management process will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a second procedure example of the reset start process. It should be noted that redundant description of processing similar to the first procedure example of the reset start processing will be omitted. Further, the processing in FIG. 9 is the same between the first procedure example and the second procedure example.

The second procedure example of the reset start process differs from the first procedure example of the reset start process in that a process during preparation (step S112a) is added.

Specifically, when it is determined to be affirmative (Yes) in step S106, when it is determined to be negative (No) in step S107, or when it is determined to be negative (No) in step S108, the preparation process (Step S112a) is executed.
Note that the execution timing of the in-preparation process (step S112a) is not limited to such timing, and can be executed at any timing during the reset start process. In other words, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is depressed, the control should be such that the transition from "preparing" to "playable state (state shifted to main loop)" is performed.

Step S112a: In the in-preparation process, the main control CPU 72 controls various operations required when clearing the RAM. Details of the processing will be described later.
Then, when the in-preparation process (step S112a) ends, the main control CPU 72 executes the RAM clear process (step S113). The subsequent processing is the same as the processing of the first procedure example.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for processing during preparation.
Step S125: The main control CPU 72 executes an operation control process during preparation. Details of the in-preparation operation control process will be described later.

Step S126: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switched ON).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch has been operated (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the reset start process (FIG. 10). On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the RAM clear switch has been operated (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the process of step S125.
By executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 can continue to execute the operation control processing during preparation in step S125 until the RAM clear switch is pressed.

[Operation control processing during preparation]
The details of the operation contents of the in-preparation operation control process are as follows.
The main control CPU 72 can execute a process that employs at least one of the following states and operations in the in-preparation operation control process.

(1) "Preparing" is a state that is shifted to when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed. During preparation, it stays until the RAM clear switch is pressed again. When the RAM clear switch is pressed in the "preparing" state, the state shifts to the "playable state".

(2) During preparation, the movable body (the movable body connected to the main controller 70) managed by the main controller 70 (the main control CPU 72) is controlled to move, and whether the movable body operates normally is controlled. You can check the movement.
Specifically, a special electric accessory (attacker), a movable body inside a special electric accessory (a movable body that opens a variable area or a specific area, a rotating body that always rotates in the case of two types, a specified trigger Movable bodies that can be moved by , mechanisms, solenoids, motors, etc. associated with them), and normal electric accessories (electric tulips) are movably controlled by a constant operation.
The movement control is executed by operating a solenoid or a motor according to a movement pattern in which, for example, "0.4 seconds ON→0.4 seconds OFF" is repeated multiple times.
The movable control may be executed continuously from the beginning to the end during preparation, or may be executed with a predetermined number of times or a predetermined time as an upper limit.

(3) During preparation, it is possible to make it clearly visible from the outside. In this case, for example, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display, information such as "preparing", "cannot play", "press RAM clear switch to end", "press effect button to change effect setting", etc. can be displayed. can. In this case, an audio output such as "Being prepared" may be repeated.

(4) During the preparation, it may be possible to change the setting regarding the effect by operating the effect button. For example, when you press the production switch button (production button), the display screen of the liquid crystal display switches, and you can select the date and time setting, volume setting (1 to 5 stages), production frequency setting (1 to 3 stages), production type setting, etc. can be made possible.

(5) During the preparation, the shooting control of game balls may be disabled. This is because game balls can be shot from the shooting control board 108 on the condition that a "shooting permission signal" is transmitted from the main controller 70 to the payout controller 92 . The main controller 70 can perform processing for transmitting the "fire enable signal" within the "interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)", but during preparation, the "interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)" Since it is a period that has not been executed yet, it will be in a state where it cannot be fired.

(6) The program for processing during preparation (program for operating various movable bodies) can be mounted (arranged) within the use area. The usable area is an area in which the gaming machine rules define the capacity that can be used to control the progress of the game, and the area outside the area is an area that is not included in the calculation of the usable capacity.

(7) During the period of preparation, external information indicating that preparation is in progress may be output to an external electronic device (eg, data display device, hall computer, etc.).

(8) During preparation is the stage before shifting to the main loop (before interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) is executed). Therefore, during preparation, the display (main segment) of the integrated display board 89 can be turned off. Also, during the preparation, it is possible not to determine errors that can be determined during the game ready state (for example, magnetic error, radio wave error, vibration error, large winning opening fraudulent winning error, etc.). Furthermore, during the preparation, it is possible not to execute payout of prize balls, variation of special symbols, and variation of normal symbols.

(9) When the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch depressed, a command indicating "preparing" can be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device. Also, when the RAM clear switch is pressed again and the preparation is completed, a command indicating "end of preparation" can be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device. In this case, the command may be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device before proceeding to the main loop.
At the stage of preparation, RAM clear processing is not executed, and RAM clear processing can be executed on condition that the RAM clear switch is pressed during preparation. However, after the RAM clear processing is executed, the processing may be shifted to the preparation state, and then the processing may be shifted to the main loop.

As a background of adopting such a configuration, there are the following problems.
In conventional game machines, the operation of special electric accessories and normal electric accessories cannot be checked at any time (especially when the power is turned on when clearing the RAM), so problems suddenly occur during normal games. It may occur.

By adopting the configuration as described above, the following effects can be exhibited.
(1) When the power is turned on, it is possible to confirm whether or not various electric accessories are operable, so that the problem of the various electric accessories not operating during the game can be prevented, and the game can be played normally.
(2) Since the game can be played normally, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.
(3) Problems can be resolved in advance (before the game is played), so the process of confirming problems during the game can be eliminated, which contributes to reducing the processing load on control.
(4) Since the effect setting can be executed during preparation (during operation confirmation), an efficient game can be provided.

The following technical content can be extracted from the above configuration.
(1) When the power is turned on while a predetermined operation member (RAM clear switch), a movable body (electric accessory, drive source, solenoid, motor, etc.) and the predetermined operation member are being operated, The game machine is provided with movable body operating means for operating the movable body in a fixed motion pattern in order to confirm whether the movable body operates normally.
(2) In the configuration of (1) above, it is preferable that the movable body operating means continues to operate the movable body in a constant motion pattern until a predetermined operation member is operated again.

[Power failure check process]
FIG. 12 is a flow chart specifically showing a procedure example of the above-described power failure occurrence check process.
Step S130: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 sets the conditions for checking the occurrence of power failure. This check condition can be set, for example, as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power interruption detection signal is continuously output.

Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power interruption detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power interruption detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, a main power disconnection detection switch is mounted, for example, in the main controller 70. This main power disconnection detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power supply disconnection detection signal is output. Note that the main power disconnection detection switch may be incorporated in the power control unit 162 . When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power interruption detection signal is not output at this time (No), it exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that the main power disconnection detection signal has been output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether the result is 0 or not. If the on-counter value is still not 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and checks the main power interruption detection switch input port again. Then, when the loop from step S134 to step S132 is repeated and the check condition is satisfied (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S136.

Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the test signal terminal and the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and the big winning opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Steps S138, S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76, excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer, in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for all areas until the addition is completed. .
Step S142: When sum calculation is completed for all areas (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the validity value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: In addition, the main control CPU 72 stores "01H" indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibited area and stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop, and stops all other processes in preparation for the shutdown of the main power supply. After the main power supply is cut off, backup power is supplied from a backup power supply circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70). held without. The backup power supply circuit may be built in the power control unit 162, for example.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (to be added to the sum) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. The stored memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming that the checksum is normal in the previous reset start process (FIG. 8).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several milliseconds) based on an interrupt request signal from the counter/timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU72 saves the values of the registers (each pair of the accumulator A and the flag register F, and the general-purpose registers B to L) used during the execution of the main loop to the saving area of the RAM76. Another value can be written to the registers (A to L) after saving the values during the interrupt management process.

Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes lottery random number update processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and looped within a prescribed range. Various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process here. The contents of the processing are the same as those described above.

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input/output (I/O) port 79 . Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the winning opening switch 86, the specific area switch 83 Reads the input state (ON/OFF) of the winning detection signal from.

Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the specific area switch 83 Based on the passage detection signal from, an event that occurred during the game is determined, and further processing is executed according to the event that has occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using another flowchart.

In this embodiment, when the winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol respectively (lottery opportunity, first lottery opportunity, second lottery opportunity). Also, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. When determining that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing according to each occurrence event. The process executed when the winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S205, step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol game process and the normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1 . Among these, in the special symbol game process (step S205), the main control CPU72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second It controls the variable display and stop display by the 2 special symbol display device 35, and controls the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later using another flowchart.

In addition, in the normal symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. to control. For example, the main control CPU72 stores the random number (determined random number per normal symbol) acquired with the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event process (step S204), and in this normal symbol game process A random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (normal symbol lottery executing means). When the random number falls within the winning range, the normal symbols are variably displayed by the normal symbol display device 33, and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner. It is excited to operate the variable starting prize winning device 28 (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs stop display of normal symbols in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signal input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), a prize ball instruction for instructing the number of prize balls to the payout control device 92 Output command.

[Regarding the number of prize balls and the number of winning game balls]
The number of prize balls for the start opening of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls for the start opening of the second special symbol are each set to a prescribed number of one or more. Also, the number of winning balls may be different between the starting opening of the first special symbol and the starting opening of the second special symbol. In addition, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of special symbols and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (average number of balls obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may Furthermore, the probability of winning a special pattern, the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired, the number of times the large winning opening is opened, the opening time of the large winning opening, the maximum winning number of the large winning opening, and the number of winning balls in the large winning opening are specified. When the conditions are satisfied, a big win may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one big win is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (e.g. winning ball information, door opening information, pattern determination number information, jackpot information, start opening) to the hall computer (external equipment) of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. information, etc.) in the port output request buffer.

In this embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 5" are output as jackpot information to the outside, so that an external electronic device (data display (external information signal output means). That is, by dividing the jackpot information into a plurality of "jackpots 1" to "jackpots 5" and outputting them, the types of jackpots (types of winnings) can be tallied and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations. Occurrence of small hits that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or the shortened state of symbol fluctuation time (hit that does not operate the conditional device) even if it is not winning. can be aggregated and managed. Also, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently jackpotting. Alternatively, it is possible to recognize whether or not the current symbol variation time is shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls in detail the respective output states (set of ON or OFF) of "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 5".

Step S209: The main control CPU 72 also executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). and store them in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70, for example.

Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 includes the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. It controls lighting states of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, and the like. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer in the special symbol game process (step S205) or the normal symbol game process (step S206) is port-output. The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner, a stop display, a working memory number display, a game state display, etc.).

Step S211: The main control CPU 72 also executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). In addition, the main control CPU 72 outputs drive signals and test signals for the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big winning opening solenoid 90, the second big winning opening solenoid 97 and the specific area solenoid 99 stored in the port output request buffer. etc. are combined and output to the port.

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes effect control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU72 in the command buffer to check whether there is a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 (command necessary for effect control), if there is an unsent command command to be output port output.

Step S213: Then, the main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored in this CTC interrupt.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing of steps S205 to S212 (game control program module) is executed as a timer interrupt processing, but these processing are executed by incorporating them into the main loop of the CPU. There are also known programming examples.

Step S214: After completing the above processing, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) designating the end of the interrupt in the interrupt program counter and ends the CTC interrupt.

Steps S215, S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the values of the saved registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. After that, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (the program address indicated by the stack pointer). In the interrupt management process, the main control CPU 72 judges various errors (magnetic error, radio wave error, vibration error, large winning opening illegal winning error, etc.) based on sensors and switches (not shown) that detect various errors. can do.

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of switch input event processing (step S204 in FIG. 13). Each procedure will be described below.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery opportunity has occurred) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. The specific contents of the processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery opportunity has occurred) from the right start winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here, similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning port 30b of the first variable winning device 30 or not. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S19 and executes the first big winning opening counting process. In the first big winning hole counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big winning game. On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S20.

Step S20: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second big winning port 31b of the second variable winning device 31 or not. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 and executes the second big winning opening counting process. In the second big winning hole counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big winning game (during the small winning game). On the other hand, if the winning detection signal has not been input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal has been input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of this passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S24. On the other hand, if the passage detection signal has not been input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S24: The main control CPU 72 executes normal symbol memory update processing. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether the current normal symbol working memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, acquires a random number per normal symbol. do. Also, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol working memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the obtained random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 . Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passing detection signal has been input from the specific area switch 83 corresponding to the specific area 31x in the second big winning opening 31b. When the input of this passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 and executes processing to turn ON the specific area reserve flag. On the other hand, if there is no passage detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 13).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory updating process (step S12 in FIG. 14). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory updating process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random numbers, the jackpot pattern random numbers, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 . Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into five sections (for example, 2 bytes each) used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. can be stored as a set (set) one by one. However, only four sections can be used for the first special symbol, and only one section can be used for the second special symbol. Therefore, even if there is an empty section, if four sections have already been used for the first special symbol, each random number for the first special symbol is no longer stored. Similarly, even if there is a vacant section, if one section is already used for the second special symbol, each random number of the second special symbol is no longer stored. The reason why there are five sections is that the number of sections required is the sum of the maximum number of memory of the first special symbol (4) and the maximum number of memory of the second special symbol (1). At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 14). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU72 adds one to the first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol working memory number counter is stored, for example, in the working memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 13).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires a big hit determination random value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). A random number is obtained by designating the pin address of the random number generator 75 . When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, address designation is performed in two batches of 1 byte each for the upper and lower bytes. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number from the specified address, it saves it as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). Acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot design random number from the designated address, it saves it as the jackpot design random number corresponding to the first special design at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: In addition, the main control CPU72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM76 as the random value related to the variation condition of the first special symbol (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random numbers is similarly performed by designating the address of the variable random number counter area. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the fluctuation pattern determination random number from the specified address, it saves them to the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot pattern random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area commonly used for the first and second special symbols, These random numbers are stored as a set in an empty section within the area (first lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, 1st to 5th) is set for a plurality of sections, and if all the 1st to 5th sections are empty at the present stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fifth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. Note that reading from the random number storage area is in FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is in the middle of a big hit. If it is other than during a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the performance based on the prediction is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: In the case other than during the big hit (step S36: No), the main control CPU72 executes the effect determination process at the time of acquisition with respect to the first special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). This process is based on the first special symbol jackpot determination random number, the jackpot pattern random number, and the variation pattern determination random number obtained in the previous steps S32 to S34, the result of the special symbol lottery and the variation time in advance (before the start of variation). It is for determining the content of the effect (so-called "prefetching"). In this process, the result of the prior determination of the first special symbol is set to the lower byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command (prefetch information).

Step S38: When executing the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU72 next sets the upper byte portion (for example, "B8H") of the special figure destination determination effect command with respect to the first special symbol (prefetching process executing means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for the special figure destination determination production for the first special symbol". In addition, since the lower byte portion of the special figure destination judgment effect command (information on success or failure and information on fluctuation time) is set in the previous acquisition time effect determination process (step S37), here the upper byte is synthesized with the lower byte By doing so, for example, a 1-word long command is generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the production command when the number of working memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, a one-word-length command is obtained by adding the increased number of working memories (eg, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte of the preceding value (eg, "BBH") of the upper byte representing the type of command. Generate production commands. At this time, the second digit of the low-order byte is set to "0" by default to indicate that the value is "the result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)". In other words, if the lower byte is "01H", it indicates that the current working memory number is "01H" as a result of incrementing by one from the previous working memory number "00H". Similarly, if the lower byte is ``02H'' to ``04H'', it means that the number of working memories ``01H'' to ``03H'' up to the previous time has increased by 1, resulting in the number of working memories ``02H'' to ``02H'' to `` 04H”. In addition, the preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the current production command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU72 executes the effect command output setting process regarding the first special symbol. In this process, the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the starting entrance winning sound control command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 ( memory number notification means).

If the above procedure is completed, or if the number of first special symbol working memories has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 14).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory updating process (step S16 in FIG. 14). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory updating process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter and checks whether the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol working memory number counter also indicates the number (number of sets) of the jackpot decision random numbers and jackpot pattern random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 . At this time, if the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 1) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 14). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and subsequent steps.

Step S41: The main control CPU72 adds one to the second special symbol working memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 15), based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 13). will be

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the big hit determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of obtaining the random number value is the same as in step S32 (FIG. 15) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The method of obtaining the random number is the same as in step S33 (FIG. 15) described above.

Step S44: In addition, the main control CPU72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 15) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot pattern random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area commonly used by the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A set of random numbers is stored in an empty section in the area (second lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). The storage method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 15) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is in the middle of a big hit. Then, if it is other than during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that, likewise, an effect based on prediction is not performed for a ball entering during a big hit.

Step S46: If it is not during the big hit (step S45a: No), then the main control CPU72 executes the effect determination process at the time of acquisition with respect to the second special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the second special symbol jackpot determination random number and the jackpot pattern random number obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect contents are determined accordingly. It is for judging. In this process, the result of the preliminary determination of the second special symbol is set to the lower byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command.

Step S47: After executing the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU72 next sets the upper byte portion (for example, "B9H") of the special figure destination determination effect command (prefetching process executing means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for the special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Here as well, the lower byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition time effect determination process (step S46). command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the production command when the number of working memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length effect command is obtained by adding the increased working memory number (eg, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte of the preceding value (eg, "BCH") of the upper byte representing the command type. to generate Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the low-order byte to "0" by default, it is possible to express that the value is "the result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)". can. It should be noted that the preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current production command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process regarding the second special symbol. As a result, a special figure destination determination production command, a production command for increasing the number of working memories, a starting opening winning sound control command, etc. are transmitted to the production control device 124 with respect to the second special symbol (means for notifying the number of memories). Also, after completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 14).

[Production determination process when acquired]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU72 executes this acquisition time effect determination process in the previous first special symbol memory update process and second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 15, step S46 in FIG. 16) (preliminary determination means, prefetch processing execution means). As described above, this processing is executed for each of the first special symbol (when the ball enters the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to the processing related to the first special symbol or the processing related to the second special symbol. The contents of the processing will be described below along each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, "00H") of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). Note that the byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of failure).

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the big hit determination random number as the first judgment random number. The random number loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the previous first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 15) or second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 16). .

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the winning value range (here, below the lower limit value) (lottery result destination determination means, prior determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit) in the A register and subtracts the loaded random number from this comparison value. Incidentally, the comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery in the pachinko machine 1 . Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether the calculation result is 0 or a positive value, for example, from the value of the flag register. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the hit value range (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the fluctuation pattern information pre-determination process at the time of deviation (variation pattern first determination means, pre-reading process execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern first determination command (prefetch information) for the variation time at the time of deviation. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior judgment information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) especially at the time of operation of the "time reduction function". For example, if the current state is the time of operation of the "time reduction function", the main control CPU 72 is based on the loaded reach determination random number, and the fluctuation time corresponds to "loss reach fluctuation (non-shortened fluctuation time)". determine whether there is As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to "missing reach fluctuation (non-shortened fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to "non-shortened fluctuation time". In addition, in the case of reach fluctuation, it is also possible to determine "reach group (type of reach)" from the reach mode random number and generate a fluctuation pattern destination determination command from the result. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "missing reach fluctuation (non-shortened fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not in operation (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 is based on the loaded reach determination random number, and the fluctuation time corresponds to "normal deviation reach fluctuation" Determine whether or not As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, if the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "usual deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of the small hit, similarly to the process at the time of loss described above.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the effect determination process at the time of acquisition and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 15) or second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 16). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not out of the hit value range but within the hit value range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This processing is for judging the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot design random number paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the previous first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 15) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 16). Then, similar to step S54, calculation using the comparison value is executed, and from the result, it is determined which winning symbol corresponds. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S78.

Step S78: The main control CPU72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For example, the special symbol destination determination value is set to "00H" when "a symbol that does not shift to the time reduction state" is set, and "01H" is set when it corresponds to a "symbol that shifts to the time reduction state". . In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit time variation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern first determination means, pre-reading process execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-described variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the time of the big hit. In the variation pattern first determination command generated here, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of the big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 15) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 16).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 13) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of special symbol game processing. The special symbol game processing includes execution selection processing (step S1000), special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000), special symbol variation during processing (step S3000), special symbol stop display processing (step S4000), and variable winning device management processing. This configuration includes a group of subroutines (program modules) of (step S5000). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the "jump table". For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the address of the return destination.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbols have not yet started variable display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and special symbol variation is in progress. If the process is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process. There are also known programming examples in which the CPU selects which process to execute next. In such a programming example, the CPU calls each process, and at the beginning step, it refers to the flags one by one and performs conditional branching (continuation/return). There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU72 performs the work of preparing the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbols. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol fluctuation process, the main control CPU72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1-byte data) is output to each segment and dot (numbers 0 to 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, and thereby the variable display of the special symbols is performed.

Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. In this case as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output to each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win or a small win (a form other than non-winning) in the previous special symbol stop display process. A big hit game or a small hit game is started according to the mode in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

[Jackpot game]
For example, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a 10-round jackpot mode, a jackpot game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set to the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbols is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the first big winning opening solenoid 90 is energized for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) for a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 10 times). , the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes in a determined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). During this time, the game balls are focused on the first variable prize winning device 30, thereby giving the player an opportunity to win a large number of prize balls (special game executing means). The opening and closing operation of the first variable prize winning device 30 at the time of a big hit is called "round", and if the number of continuous operations is 10 times in total, these are sometimes collectively called "10 rounds". In this embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided for the 10-round jackpot. As types of jackpots, not only the 10-round jackpot, but also other round jackpots may be provided.

In addition, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (the number of rounds, the number of opening and closing operations per round, the opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the opening and closing of the first variable winning device 30 for one round The value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 each time the operation is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. A round number command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 124 in production|presentation control output processing (step S212 in FIG. 13). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big win game (big role) for that round only.

Then, when the jackpot game is finished, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (time shortening state) after the jackpot game is finished based on the game state flag (time shortening function operation flag) (time shortening state transition means, state transition means). . In the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, the lottery probability of the normal pattern operation lottery is set from normal probability (low probability) to high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shortened and the variable start prize The opening time of the device 28 is extended and the number of times of opening is increased (so-called electric chew support is performed). In addition, a game machine that includes the elements of a so-called 2-type game machine (for example, a 1-type 2-type mixing machine or a 2-type game machine, that is, a jackpot game is executed by passing a game ball through a specific area during a small win game. In the game machine), the winning probability of the normal symbol operation lottery may not be shifted to the high probability state. In this case, the probability of winning the operation lottery of normal symbols is set to a fixed probability (for example, approximately 1/1) regardless of whether or not the time reduction function is operated, and the opening pattern of the variable start-up prize device 28 makes it easy to win a prize. Difficulty can be adjusted.

[small hit]
In addition, in this embodiment, a small win is provided as a winning type other than non-winning. When a small win is won, a small win game is played separately from the big win game, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes (special game executing means). For example, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a small winning mode, a small winning game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the small winning game, the jump destination is set to the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the second big winning opening solenoid 97 operates for a certain period of time (for example, 1.8 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) for a preset number of times (for example, once or multiple times). It is excited, and thereby the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes in a determined pattern (operation of special electric accessory). During this time, the player is given an opportunity to win a certain amount of prize balls by intensively winning the game balls to the second variable prize winning device 31 (special game executing means).

In addition, in the variable winning device management process during the small winning game, the specific area solenoid 99 is energized for a certain period of time (for example, 1.6 seconds) for a preset number of times (for example, once). The slide member 31c opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. By allowing the game ball to pass through the specific area 31x during this period, the player is given an opportunity to start a big hit game. That is, whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game determines whether or not to start the big winning game in the variable winning device management process. In this embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided for small wins, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, a big win game corresponding to the winning type is started.

Also, even if the game with a small hit ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 31x, the "time reduction function" does not operate, so the benefit of shifting to the "time reduction state" is not given (for that reason is not a prerequisite for ). It should be noted that when a small win is won in the "time shortened state", the "time shortened state" may end after the small win game ends.

[Multiple winning types]
In this embodiment, "10-round jackpots 1 to 6" are provided as a plurality of winning types. ``10 round big wins 1 to 4'' are started when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a big win mode, and ``10 round big wins 5 and 6'' are stopped and displayed in a small win mode with the special symbols. It is started when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the winning game. In addition, when a big win is executed by "10 round big wins 5 and 6" (when a big win is executed via a small win), the second variable winning device 31 operates in the first round, and the first variable winning device 31 operates in the remaining rounds. The variable winning device 30 is activated.

The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stop-displayed at the time of winning. For example, "10 round big win 1" corresponds to the big win of the "first winning symbol", and "10 round big win 2" corresponds to the big winning of the "second winning symbol". Also, "10 round big win 3" corresponds to the big win of "third winning pattern", and "10 round big win 4" corresponds to the big winning of "fourth winning pattern". Furthermore, the "10 round big win 5" corresponds to the "5th winning pattern" small win (big hit when passing through the specific area 31x), and the "10 round big win 6" corresponds to the "6th winning pattern" small win (specific area It corresponds to a big hit when passing 31x). For this reason, hereinafter, the "winning type" is appropriately referred to as "winning design".

[1st winning pattern]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the "first winning symbol", a big win game is executed (special game executing means). In this case, the opening of the first big winning opening 30b is performed once for a sufficiently long period of time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the jackpot game of the "first winning symbol" is a jackpot game capable of providing the player with 10 rounds worth of balls (prize balls). In addition, the first big winning opening 30b is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse when a predetermined number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur within one round (the same applies hereinafter). . In this case, by activating the "time shortening function" after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the "time shortening state" (the number of times of time saving = 1 time or 10 times).

[Second winning pattern]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the "second winning symbol", a big win game is executed (special game executing means). In this case, the opening of the first big winning opening 30b is performed once for a sufficiently long period of time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the jackpot game of the "second winning symbol" is a jackpot game capable of providing the player with 10 rounds worth of balls (prize balls). In this case, the "time shortening function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

[3rd winning pattern]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the "third winning symbol", a big win game is executed (special game executing means). In this case, the opening of the first big winning opening 30b is performed once for a sufficiently long period of time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the jackpot game of the "third winning symbol" is a jackpot game capable of providing the player with 10 rounds worth of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time shortening function" after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the "time shortening state" (the number of times of time saving = 1 time or 10 times).

[4th winning pattern]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the "fourth winning symbol", a big win game is executed (special game executing means). In this case, the opening of the first big winning opening 30b is performed once for a sufficiently long period of time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the jackpot game of the "fourth winning symbol" is a jackpot game capable of providing the player with 10 rounds worth of balls (prize balls). In this case, the "time shortening function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

[5th winning pattern]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the "fifth winning symbol", a small winning game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, The small winning game state is shifted to the big winning game state. In this case, from the second round, the first big winning hole 30b is opened once for a sufficiently long time (for example, the longest opening time is 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, in the jackpot game when the "fifth winning symbol" is applied, it is possible to provide the player with 9 rounds worth of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time shortening function" after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the "time shortening state" (the number of times of time saving = 1 time or 10 times).

[6th winning design]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the "sixth winning symbol", a small winning game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, The small winning game state is shifted to the big winning game state. In this case, from the second round, the first big winning hole 30b is opened once for a sufficiently long time (for example, the longest opening time is 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, in the jackpot game when the "sixth winning symbol" is applied, it is possible to provide the player with 9 rounds worth of balls (prize balls). In this case, the "time shortening function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the "first winning symbol", the "third winning symbol" or the "fifth winning symbol" is met, there is a possibility of shifting to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game ends. .

In this way, when a small win is won in the internal lottery and the game ball passes through the specific area during the small win game, the big win game is executed, and after the big win game is completed, the time is shifted to a shortened state according to the type of the winning pattern. The game machine is called a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type game machine.

[Special symbol change preprocessing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of special symbol variation preprocessing. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76 . When the working memory numbers of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demonstration setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 13). When the demonstration setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. When returning, it returns to the end address as described above (same hereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 reads the lottery random numbers (big hit decision random numbers, big hit pattern random numbers) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 in the order of acquisition. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then shifts (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ). The read random number is saved, for example, in another temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next big hit determination process. In this embodiment, the random numbers are read out in the order in which they are stored (acquired) in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 (digestion in winning order). It should be noted that, instead of such control of winning order digestion for each special symbol, priority digestion control that prioritizes digestion of the second special symbol may be used. Also, in this process, the main control CPU72 subtracts one from the value of the working memory number counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol, whichever shifted the random number) stored in the RAM76, and subtracts The latter value is set as the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, the display mode of the number of memories by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decrease by 1) in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 13). . After completing the procedure up to this point, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2300.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. In the previous special symbol variation pre-processing, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than "0" (step S2100 in FIG. 19: Yes), the main control CPU72 executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S2210: The main control CPU72 refers to the random number storage area and checks whether the oldest memory corresponds to the second special symbol. This confirmation can be realized by confirming whether or not the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the first section of the random number storage area of the RAM76. At this time, when it is confirmed that the oldest memory corresponds to the second special symbol (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU72 designates the second special symbol as the target special symbol. This designation is performed by setting, for example, "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the oldest memory corresponds to the second special symbol (step S2210: No), that is, if the oldest memory corresponds to the first special symbol, the main The control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the target special symbol. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM76. It should be noted that the specific contents of the processing are as already described in the previous special symbol variation preprocessing.

Step S2218: Then the main control CPU72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the current target special symbol is the second special symbol, the main control CPU72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the "variation start working memory number" from the value of the working memory counter after the subtraction. In addition, here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, after adding the value of the working memory counter, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation" may be set.

Step S2222: Also, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the target special symbol is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target special symbol is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the effect command when the working memory number is reduced with respect to the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a command of one word length, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-described "effect command when the number of working memories increases". That is, the working memory number decrease effect command is a value of the lower byte (eg, "00H" to "03H") representing the number of working memories after the decrease with respect to the preceding value (eg, "BCH") of the upper byte representing the command type. ”) is added, and an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is added (logical OR) to the value of the lower byte. Therefore, for the lower byte, the addition value "10H" is logically summed, and the second digit becomes "1". become a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time "4" (the command notation is "14H") has decreased by one, resulting in the current number of working memories being "3" (command The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of the previous working memory number "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") decreasing by one. , indicates that the current number of working memories is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). It should be noted that the preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: In addition, when the current target special symbol is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the production command when the working memory number is reduced with respect to the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes effect command output processing. This processing is for transmitting to the effect control device 124 the effect command set at the previous step S2224 or step S2226 (storage number notifying means).
After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 19).

[See Figure 19: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes big hit determination processing (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets the range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution means). means). If the random number value read at this time is included in the jackpot value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H) and then proceeds to step S2400.

If the big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values in the same big hit determination process, and determines whether the read random number value is included in this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution means). The "minor win" referred to here is anything other than non-winning (lose), but has a different nature from the "big win". In other words, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (game turning point) for shifting to the "time shortening state", but the "minor win" does not generate such an opportunity. A "minor hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for activating only the second variable winning device 31 (the condition for activating the condition device is not satisfied). Furthermore, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the "small hit", it is positioned as a development to the "big hit" (the conditions for operating the condition device are satisfied). In any case, if the read random number is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. Thus, in this embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance as the hit range other than the non-winning, but the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and compared with the random number to determine the big hit.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the big win is set to 1/319, and the small win is not set. In addition, in the first special symbol lottery, a small hit may be won. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a big hit is set to 1/319, and the probability of winning a small hit is set to 318/319 (=approximately 1/1), and falls under It is designed not to. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, it may correspond to a loss. Therefore, in the second special symbol lottery, it is easier to win a small win than a big win. In order to satisfy the probability of winning the big hit and the probability of winning the small win, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the big win value and the range of the small win value and compares them with the read random numbers.

In addition, the main control CPU72, in the non-shortening state (predetermined game state), lottery opportunity of the second special symbol (second lottery opportunity) less likely to occur than the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol (first lottery opportunity) occurs, a second special symbol lottery (second lottery) is executed (second lottery executing means).

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the big hit flag has been set to the value (01H) in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set to the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU72 determines whether or not the value (01H) has been set to the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the small hit flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. In addition, the main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, set 01H) or a small hit (for example, set 0AH) by the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes stop symbol determination processing when losing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of loss by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 . Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (when lost) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 13).

In addition, in this embodiment, since 7-segment LEDs are used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of loss is always one segment (center The stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H) with only the lighting display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used on the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to a variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) (not shown) and executes variation pattern determination processing at the time of deviation (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of loss for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the variation display of the special symbol, or corresponds to the variation time required for the variation display. Variation patterns include various variation patterns such as normal variation (non-reach variation), reach variation, super reach variation, etc. (same applies to big wins and small wins). The information about the variation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to the effect control device as a variation pattern command including information as to whether or not it is a special variation (the same is true for the big hit and the small hit). ).

Here, since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether it is the above-mentioned "time reduction state" or not, the main control CPU72 loads the game state flag in this process, and the current state is "time reduction status”. Also, even if it is not in the "time shortening state", the fluctuation time at the time of failure is set in step S2200, for example, "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display: 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display: 1 → about 8 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display 2 pieces → about 5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of the fluctuation display 3 pieces → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of loss is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variable time (at the time of loss) to the variable timer, and also sets the value of the stop display time at the time of loss to the stop symbol display timer.

The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is lost (other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes) , the main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the current winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of the big hit) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the big hit symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in a special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the big-hit stop symbol selection table in the big-hit stop symbol determination process, and can determine the type of the winning symbol based on the big-hit symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning pattern at the time of the big hit]
In this embodiment, four types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The breakdown regarding the first special design is "first winning design" or "second winning design", and the breakdown regarding the second special design is "third winning design" or "fourth winning design". Each of these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "first winning design", "first winning design A", "first winning design B", "first winning design C", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of winning symbols selected at the time of a big hit in the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbols to be selected depending on whether the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[Stop symbol selection table at the time of the first special symbol jackpot]
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a first special symbol jackpot time stop symbol selection table. When the result of this big win corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to this first special symbol big win stop symbol selection table (winning kind defining means) and determines the kind of the winning symbol.

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the allocation values for each winning symbol. Equivalent to. In addition, the second column from the left shows "first winning symbol" and "second winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value. That is, when the jackpot corresponding to the first special symbol is selected, the ratio of selecting the "first winning symbol" is 52/100 (=52%), and the percentage of selecting the "second winning symbol" is 100. 48 minutes (=48%). The magnitude of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. to selectively determine winning patterns. In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, as shown in the third column from the left, 2-byte command data, for example, is defined as a winning stop symbol command. The stop symbol command is described, for example, as a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, of which the upper byte MODE value "B1H" indicates that the current winning symbol was selected when the first special symbol was a big hit. represents. Also, the EVENT values "01H" and "02H" in the lower bytes represent the types of corresponding winning symbols in the selection table. For this reason, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol and the "first winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as "B1H01H". It will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the stop symbol selection table for the first special symbol jackpot, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the above effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number of times]
The column on the right side of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table shows the value of the number of time reductions given after the jackpot game ends. In this embodiment, when it corresponds to the "first winning pattern", regardless of whether it is normal (non-time reduction state) or during time reduction (time reduction state), the number of times of time reduction is 1 time (or 10 times ) is granted.

In addition, when it corresponds to the "second winning pattern", the number of times of time saving is given 0 times (not given) regardless of whether it is during normal time or during time saving. In addition, the number of times of time saving may be two times or more (11 times or more) without being limited to the above value.

Here, "1 time (or 10 times)" means that the total number of variations of the second special symbol is 1 time, or the total number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 10 times. It means that the shortened state ends.

[Stop symbol selection table at the time of the second special symbol jackpot]
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72, when the result of this big win corresponds to the second special symbol, determines the kind of the winning symbol by referring to this second special symbol big win stop symbol selection table (winning kind defining means).

In the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column also shows the allocation values for each winning symbol, and each allocation value "100" corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. . Similarly, the second column from the left shows "third winning symbol" and "fourth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value. That is, when the jackpot corresponding to the second special symbol is selected, the ratio of selecting the "third winning symbol" is 50/100 (=50%), and the percentage of selecting the "fourth winning symbol" is 100. 50 minutes (=50%).

When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol at the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. to decide Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, as shown in the third column from the left, 2-byte command data, for example, is defined as a winning stop symbol command. Here too, the stop symbol command is described as a combination of the above MODE value and EVENT value, of which the upper byte MODE value "B2H" is selected when the winning symbol of this time hits the second special symbol. It means that Also, the EVENT value "01H" in the lower byte represents the type of winning symbol corresponding in the selection table. For this reason, for example, if the result of the big win this time corresponds to the second special symbol and the "third winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described as "B2H01H". .

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot time stop symbol selection table, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the above effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number of times]
In the column on the right side of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions to be given after the jackpot game is finished is shown. In this embodiment, when the "third winning pattern" is applied, the number of times of time saving is provided once (or 10 times) regardless of whether it is during normal time or during time saving.

Also, when it corresponds to the "fourth winning pattern", regardless of whether it is normal or during time saving, the number of times of time saving is given (not given).

[See Figure 19: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the variation pattern determination process at the time of the big hit (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variable time to the variable timer, and also sets the value of the stop display time to the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach variation, a longer variation time than when losing is determined.

Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of the big hit. In this process, if the winning symbol type (jackpot stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 is "first winning symbol" or "third winning symbol", the main control CPU72 stores the flag area of the RAM76. A time shortening function activation flag as a certain game state flag is set to ON (01H) (time shortening state transition means, time shortening function activation means, state transition means).

By executing such a process, the main control CPU72, when winning with the winning symbol that shifts to the time reduction state (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), changes from the non-time reduction state (first state) to the time reduction state ( second state) (state transition means).

Also, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (jackpot symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol at the time of the small win (stop symbol number at the time of the small win) based on the big hit symbol random number. Here, similarly, the relationship between the big hit symbol random number and the type of the winning symbol at the time of the small win is defined in advance in the stop symbol selection table at the time of the small win (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol random number is used to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72 to determine the winning symbol at the time of the small hit, but a dedicated random number may be used separately. Further, in this embodiment, a small hit is not set for the first special symbol, but is set only for the second special symbol.

[Election design at the time of small hit]
In this embodiment, two types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols selectively determined at the time of a small hit. The breakdown of the two types is "fifth winning design" and "sixth winning design". Incidentally, these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "fifth winning design", "fifth winning design A", "fifth winning design B", "fifth winning design C", and so on.

[Stop symbol selection table for second special symbol small hit]
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol by referring to this second special symbol small hit time stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Also in the second special symbol small winning stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for each winning symbol are shown in the left column, and each distribution value "50", "50" is when the denominator is 100. equivalent to a proportion of Similarly, the second column from the left shows the "fifth winning symbol" and the "sixth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value. That is, at the time of the small hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "fifth winning design" is 50/100 (=50%), and the percentage of selecting the "sixth winning design". is 50/100 (=50%).

As a result of the small hit this time, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selectively determines the winning symbol at the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol small hit stopping symbol selection table. In the second special symbol small winning stop symbol selection table, as shown in the third column from the left, 2-byte command data, for example, is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning. Here too, the stop symbol command is described as a combination of the above MODE value and EVENT value, of which the upper byte MODE value "B2H" was selected when the current winning symbol was a second special symbol hit. It means that it is something. Also, the EVENT values "03H" and "04H" in the lower bytes represent the types of corresponding winning symbols in the selection table. For this reason, for example, when the "fifth winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol as a result of the small win this time, the stop symbol command is described as "B2H03H".

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the above effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 determines the small hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number of times]
In the column on the right side of the second special symbol small winning stop symbol selection table, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, the big winning game is started, and the number of times of shortening time given after the big winning game is finished. values are shown. In this embodiment, when the "fifth winning pattern" is applied, the number of times of time saving is provided once (or 10 times) regardless of whether it is during normal time or during time saving.

Also, when it corresponds to the "sixth winning pattern", regardless of whether it is normal or during time saving, the number of times of time saving is given 0 times (not given).

By using the stop symbol selection table for the first special symbol big hit, the stop symbol selection table for the second special symbol big hit, and the stop symbol selection table for the second special symbol small hit, the main control CPU 72 is in a non-time reduction state or In the case of "1st winning pattern", "3rd winning pattern" or "5th winning pattern" in the time shortened state (for the 5th winning pattern, it is limited to when a jackpot game is executed), time A transition condition to the shortened state can be satisfied (transition condition setting means).

[See Figure 19: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes a small hit variation pattern determination process (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variable time to the variable timer, and sets the value of the stop display time to the stop symbol display timer. In this embodiment, the small hit is set only in the second special symbol lottery, and at the time of the small hit, a variation pattern having a variation time for the small hit is selected. In addition, you may set a small hit to a 1st special design lottery.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop design (small hit design) by the second special design display device 35 based on the small hit stop design number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects variation pattern data based on the variation pattern number (when lost/when hit). In addition, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol fluctuation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 . Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU72 sets the special symbol fluctuation process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 18: Processing during special symbol fluctuation, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, as described above, the main control CPU72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count or interrupt counter value) Decrement the value of the counter. Then, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the timer counter and controls the variable display of the special symbol as described above until the value becomes zero. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) to the next jump destination.

Also, in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (steps S2404, S2407 and S2410 in FIG. 19). Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time during the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol fluctuation flag.

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the process during special symbol stop display. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired, based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet expired (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 18) and repeats the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has expired (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. Also, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol-fluctuation flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbols has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the jackpot flag value (01H) is set. If the jackpot flag value (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When elected]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to "variable winning device management processing". Note that the main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the time shortening function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (big role) is started, the game is shifted to the normal state (non-time reduction state).

When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not elected]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the time of the big hit.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot flag value (01H) is not set in step S4300 (No), then step S4600 is executed.

Step S4600: The main control CPU72 then checks whether or not the small hit flag value (01H) is set. Then, the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set, and if it is simply a loss (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol variation pre-processing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, if the small hit flag value (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4608: The main control CPU 72 executes special fluctuation frequency update processing. In this process, when both the number of special variations of the first special symbol and the number of special variations of the second special symbol are 0, no process is executed. On the other hand, when the number of special variations of the first special symbol is 1 or more and the first special symbol stops, a process of decrementing (-1) the number of special variations of the first special symbol is executed. Also, when the number of special variations of the second special symbol is 1 or more and the second special symbol stops, a process of decrementing (-1) the number of special variations of the second special symbol is executed. The number of special variations of the first special symbol and the number of special variations of the second special symbol are reset at the start of the jackpot game. In addition, regardless of whether the number of special variations of the first special symbol or the number of special variations of the second special symbol is 0 or 1 or more, when this process is executed, the main control CPU 72 is the first special symbol and a special variation frequency designation command reflecting the value of the special variation frequency of the second special symbol can be transmitted to the effect control device.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number cutting counter. As for the "number of cutting counter", the counter value related to the "time reduction state" is set in the time reduction count area of the RAM76. In this embodiment, a so-called cut time reduction function is adopted, and when shifting to the "time reduction state", the first cut counter value related to the time reduction state (total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol The number of times of time saving) is set to a predetermined value (for example 10 times), and the second cut counter value (number of times of time saving of the second special symbol) regarding the time shortening state is set to a specified value (for example 1 time). Information on the first cut counter value and the second cut counter value is notified (transmitted) to the effect control device 124 by the cut counter command.
It should be noted that the number-of-times cutting counter value related to the time reduction state is controlled by only one counter value without providing two counter values such as a first number-of-cutting counter value and a second number-of-cutting counter value. good too.

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value (first cut counter value or second cut counter value) is zero. At this time, if the number of cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the number cut counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the first cut counter value and the second cut counter value. Specifically, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, both the first cut counter value and the second cut counter value are decremented, and when the first special pattern is stopped and displayed decrements only the first tick counter value.

Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result of one of the number-of-times counter values (the first number-of-times counter value or the second number-of-times counter value) is zero. As a result of the subtraction, when none of the number-of-times counter values is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if any of the number cutting counter values are 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the multiple cut function is activated. In this embodiment, the number-of-times cutting counter value for the time shortening state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 1 time or 10 times). When the deviation variation of the second special symbol once in the time shortening state (including the small hit variation at that time when it does not pass through the specific area) is executed, the time shortening function operation flag is reset. On the other hand, even if the deviation variation of the first special symbol is executed nine times in the time shortening state, the time shortening function operation flag is not reset, and then the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed once in the time shortening state. When an off-variation is performed, the time reduction function activation flag is reset. As a result, the time shortening state ends after the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, the time reduction function activation flag is explained in the example of resetting when the stop display time of the special design has passed, but even if it is reset at the end of the fluctuation time of the special design (before the start of stop display time measurement) good.
And, when the above procedure is finished, it returns to the special symbol game process.

Thus, the condition for ending the time shortening state (predetermined condition for ending) is when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after shifting to the time shortening state reaches the first number (for example, once), or When the total number of fluctuations obtained by summing the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after shifting to the time shortening state reaches the second number (for example, 10 times) larger than the first number condition is satisfied.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a list of fluctuation pattern tables.
The fluctuation pattern table includes seven fluctuation pattern tables A to G.
The main control CPU 72 can select any one of the seven variation pattern tables A to G according to the game state. Each variation pattern table contains one or more variation patterns. For example, when the variation pattern table A is selected, the selected variation pattern may differ between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. This point is the same for other variation pattern tables. In addition, the "game state" in the figure indicates the game state after the jackpot game ends (the game state of the shift destination). However, the "game state" in the figure may be the game state (game state before transition) before the start of the jackpot game.

The variation pattern table A is selected when the game state is "no time reduction (non-time reduction state)". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state. Note that this table is selected even after the RAM is cleared.

The variation pattern table B is selected when the game state is "no time saving". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state. The difference between the variation pattern table A and the variation pattern table B is that the variation pattern table B is a table that is selected within a specified number of variations (for example, up to 30 variations) after the time shortening state ends. . The fluctuation pattern table B is a so-called immediate stop prevention table.

The variation pattern table C is selected when the game state is "with time reduction (time reduction state)". Specifically, when the time-saving design in the normal state is elected (when the "first winning design" or "third winning design" is elected), when the first special design fluctuates 1 to 4, 6 to 9 selected. In this table, a variation pattern with a short variation time (eg, 1 second variation) is set for the first special symbol, and a variation pattern with a long variation time (eg, 120 seconds variation) is set for the second special symbol. is set.

The variation pattern table D is selected when the game state is "time saving". Specifically, it is selected during the time saving state. In this table, a variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, variation of 90 seconds) is set for the first special symbol.

The variation pattern table E is selected when the game state is "no time saving". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state (remaining 1 time = when the second special symbol fluctuates for one fluctuation after the end of the time shortening state). In this table, a variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, variation of 120 seconds) is set for the second special symbol.

The variation pattern table F is selected when the game state is "no time saving". Specifically, it is selected when the variation pattern table B is finally changed.

The variation pattern table G is selected when the game state is "with time saving". Specifically, it is selected when the first special symbol fluctuates by 5 or 10 when the symbol with reduced working hours is elected in the normal state. In this table, a variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, variation of 13.5 seconds) is set for the first special symbol.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortening state.
Here, "the number of times of time saving" in the figure indicates the value to be set to the first cutting counter value (the number of times of time saving of the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (also in FIG. 28).

[No.1]
If the "winning design" is "1st winning design (1st special design, 10R, time saving 1 time)", the "time saving number" is "10 times", and the "1st special design special fluctuation number" is " 10 times.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 4" and "6 to 9", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table C".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the big hit is "5" or "10", the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table G".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No.2]
If the "winning design" is the "second winning design (first special design, 10R, no time saving)", the "number of times of time saving" is "0 times", and the "number of special fluctuations of the first special design" is "20 times”.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No.3]
If the "winning design" is the "third winning design (second special design, 10R, time saving 1 time)", the "time saving number of times" is "10 times", and the "special fluctuation number of the first special design" is " 10 times.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No.4]
If the "winning design" is "4th winning design (2nd special design, 10R, no time saving)", the "time saving number" is "0 times", and the "1st special design special fluctuation number" is "20 times”.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No. 5 (pass through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "5th winning pattern (2nd special pattern, 10R, time saving 1 time)" and the game ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time saving number" is "10 times" Then, "the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" becomes "10 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No 5 (non-passing through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "5th winning pattern (2nd special pattern, 10R, time saving 1 time)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time saving number" is "0 times”, and the “number of special variations of the first special symbol” becomes “0 times”.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No. 6 (pass through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "6th winning pattern (second special pattern, 10R, no time saving)" and the game ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time saving number" becomes "0 times" , "The number of special variations of the first special symbol" is "20 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No. 6 (not passing through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "6th winning pattern (second special pattern, 10R, no time saving)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time saving number" is "0 times ”, and “the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol” becomes “0 times”.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation after the big hit game is the second special symbol in the big hit from the non-time shortening state.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol changes, it becomes a big hit or a small hit, so there is no special change table after the second change.
Here, "time saving number of times of the second special symbol" in the drawing indicates the value to be set to the second cutting counter value (time saving number of times of only the second special symbol) (also in FIG. 29).

[No.1]
If the "winning design" is the "first winning design (first special design, 10R, time saving 1 time)", the "second special design time saving number of times" will be "1 time", and the "second special design special The number of fluctuations" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table referred to is "variation pattern table C".

[No.2]
If the "winning design" is the "second winning design (first special design, 10R, no time saving)", the "time saving number of the second special design" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special design The number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table B".

[No.3]
If the "winning design" is the "third winning design (second special design, 10R, time saving 1 time)", the "time saving number of the second special design" will be "1 time", and the "second special design special The number of fluctuations" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table D".

[No.4]
If the "winning design" is "4th winning design (2nd special design, 10R, no time saving)", "2nd special design time saving number" is "0 times", "2nd special design special fluctuation The number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table B".

[No. 5 (pass through specific area)]
"Winning design" is "5th winning design (2nd special design, 10R, time saving 1 time)", and when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game, "2nd special design time saving number" is "1 time", and "the number of special variations of the second special symbol" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table D".

[No 5 (non-passing through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "5th winning pattern (2nd special pattern, 10R, time saving 1 time)", and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, "time saving of the 2nd special pattern The number of times" becomes "0 times", and the "number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" becomes "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No. 6 (pass through specific area)]
"Winning design" is "6th winning design (2nd special design, 10R, no time saving)", and when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game, "Time saving number of 2nd special design" is It becomes "0 times", and "the number of special variations in the second special symbol" becomes "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table B".

[No. 6 (not passing through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "6th winning pattern (second special pattern, 10R, no time saving)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, "time saving number of second special patterns ” becomes “0 times”, and “the number of special variations of the second special symbol” becomes “0 times”.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the time shortening state.

[No.1]
If the "winning design" is "1st winning design (1st special design, 10R, time saving 1 time)", the "time saving number" is "10 times", and the "1st special design special fluctuation number" is " 10 times.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No.2]
If the "winning design" is the "second winning design (first special design, 10R, no time saving)", the "number of times of time saving" is "0 times", and the "number of special fluctuations of the first special design" is "20 times”.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No.3]
If the "winning design" is the "third winning design (second special design, 10R, time saving 1 time)", the "time saving number of times" is "10 times", and the "special fluctuation number of the first special design" is " 10 times.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No.4]
If the "winning design" is "4th winning design (2nd special design, 10R, no time saving)", the "time saving number" is "0 times", and the "1st special design special fluctuation number" is "20 times”.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No. 5 (pass through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "5th winning pattern (2nd special pattern, 10R, time saving 1 time)" and the game ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time saving number" is "10 times" Then, "the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" becomes "10 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No 5 (non-passing through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "5th winning pattern (2nd special pattern, 10R, time saving 1 time)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time saving number" is "0 times”, and the “number of special variations of the first special symbol” becomes “0 times”.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No. 6 (pass through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "6th winning pattern (second special pattern, 10R, no time saving)" and the game ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time saving number" becomes "0 times" , "The number of special variations of the first special symbol" is "20 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No. 6 (not passing through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "6th winning pattern (second special pattern, 10R, no time saving)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time saving number" is "0 times ”, and “the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol” becomes “0 times”.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation after the jackpot game from the time shortening state is the second special symbol.
It should be noted that, as in FIG. 27, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol fluctuates, the big hit or the small hit occurs, so there is no special fluctuation table for the second and subsequent fluctuations.

[No.1]
If the "winning design" is the "first winning design (first special design, 10R, time saving 1 time)", the "second special design time saving number of times" will be "1 time", and the "second special design special The number of fluctuations" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table D".

[No.2]
If the "winning design" is the "second winning design (first special design, 10R, no time saving)", the "time saving number of the second special design" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special design The number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table E".

[No.3]
If the "winning design" is the "third winning design (second special design, 10R, time saving 1 time)", the "time saving number of the second special design" will be "1 time", and the "second special design special The number of fluctuations" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table D".

[No.4]
If the "winning design" is "4th winning design (2nd special design, 10R, no time saving)", "2nd special design time saving number" is "0 times", "2nd special design special fluctuation The number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table E".

[No. 5 (pass through specific area)]
"Winning design" is "5th winning design (2nd special design, 10R, time saving 1 time)", and when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game, "2nd special design time saving number" is "1 time", and "the number of special variations of the second special symbol" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table D".

[No 5 (non-passing through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "5th winning pattern (2nd special pattern, 10R, time saving 1 time)", and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, "time saving of the 2nd special pattern The number of times" becomes "0 times", and the "number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" becomes "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No. 6 (pass through specific area)]
"Winning design" is "6th winning design (2nd special design, 10R, no time saving)", and when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game, "Time saving number of 2nd special design" is It becomes "0 times", and "the number of special variations in the second special symbol" becomes "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table E".

[No. 6 (not passing through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "6th winning pattern (second special pattern, 10R, no time saving)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, "time saving number of second special patterns ” becomes “0 times”, and “the number of special variations of the second special symbol” becomes “0 times”.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

By adopting such a variation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 can change the first special symbol variation time ( For example, 1 second) can be made relatively shorter than the variation time (eg, 2 seconds or more and less than 120 seconds) of the first special symbol in the non-time shortening state (first state) (variation time determination means) .

In addition, by adopting such a variation pattern table, the main control CPU 72, after shifting to the consecutive game state (second state) and executing the big hit game, can perform the second game in the consecutive game state (second state). It is possible to make the variation time (for example, 120 seconds or more) of one special symbol relatively longer than the variation time (for example, less than 120 seconds) of the first special symbol in the non-time reduction state (first state) ( variable time determination means).

Furthermore, by adopting such a variation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 can determine the variation time (variation The pattern table D) is made relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the first special pattern (fluctuation pattern table C) when winning in the first special pattern lottery (first lottery) and shifting to the continuous state. possible (fluctuation time determination means).

By adopting such a variation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 can change the first special symbol variation time ( For example, 1 second) can determine the variation time so that it is relatively shorter than the variation time (eg, 2 seconds or more and less than 120 seconds) of the first special symbol in the non-time shortening state (first state) (variation time determining means).

In addition, by adopting such a variation pattern table, the main control CPU 72, after shifting to the consecutive game state (second state) and executing the big hit game, can perform the second game in the consecutive game state (second state). Determine the variation time so that the variation time of one special symbol (for example, 120 seconds or more) is relatively longer than the variation time of the first special symbol in the non-time reduction state (first state) (for example, less than 120 seconds) possible (fluctuation time determination means).

Furthermore, by adopting such a variation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 can determine the variation time (variation The pattern table D) is set to be relatively longer than the variation time of the first special symbol (fluctuation pattern table C) when winning the first special symbol lottery (first lottery) and shifting to the continuous state. A variable time can be determined (variable time determining means).

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 13) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operating memory display setting process (step S1230) are performed by the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34 as already described. Generate and output a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a. processing.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation count display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the gaming state display device . First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU72 controls lighting of the time reduction state display lamp 38e according to the value of the time reduction function operation flag. For example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on, the main control CPU 72 turns on the time reduction status display lamp 38e. A lighting signal is output to the corresponding LED. Furthermore, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the firing position designation display lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by a big win game or a small win game, the main control CPU 72 sends a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation display lamp 38f. Output. In addition, if the value (01H) is set to the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU72 in addition to the above time reduction state display lamp 38e, the lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation display lamp 38f to output In addition, when the launch position designation display lamp 38f shifts to the "time reduction state" after a big win game, it lights up from the start of the big win game until the "time reduction state" ends, and does not light up when the "time reduction state" ends. (OFF).

The main control CPU 72 manages the firing position by means of a firing position designation flag (0 = left firing state, 1 = right firing state) that indicates whether it is a left-handed state or a right-handed state, and designates a firing position at an arbitrary timing. A launch position specification command including the content of the flag can be sent to the production control device. Here, when the right hitting information lamp is connected to the production control device, the production control device can control the lighting mode of the right hitting information lamp based on the firing position designation command. The non-reduced time state is the left-handed state, and the time-reduced state is the right-handed state. During the big win game or the small win game, the player is basically in the right-handed state, but the left-handed state may be set during the ending time (during the end time).

The time reduction state can be terminated at the end of the final variation (losing variation, small winning variation or big winning variation) in the time shortening state (at the start of the stop display time). In this case, the stop display time of the final variation in the time shortened state can be set to a longer time (15.0 seconds) than the stop display time (0.5 seconds) of other than the final variation. Note that the time shortening state may be terminated at the end of the stop display time of the final variation in the time shortening state.

In addition, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation count display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for one of the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is any one of the display lamps 38a, 38b corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated by the value of the number of continuous operation status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "10 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a representing "10 rounds (10R)". Also, in this embodiment, there is no jackpot other than the 10-round jackpot, but there is, for example, a 4-round jackpot as a jackpot other than the 10-round jackpot, and the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "4 rounds". If so, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing "4 rounds (4R)". It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, when there is only one type of jackpot (when there are only 10-round jackpots), the jackpot type display lamp may not be lit.

[Variable winning device management processing]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of variable winning device management processing. The variable winning device management process includes a game process selection process (step S5100), a large winning opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a large winning opening opening/closing operation process (step S5300), a large winning opening closing process (step S5400), and finished. This configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process to the stack pointer as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening/closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200). On the other hand, if the large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the large winning opening opening/closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and completes up to the large winning opening opening/closing operation process. If so, the big winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. In addition, when the large winning opening opening/closing operation process and the large winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of consecutive operations (the number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects the end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. . Each process will be described in more detail below.

[Large prize opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process. This processing is for setting the conditions such as the number of opening and closing operations of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the big win or the small win, and the time for each opening. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the jackpot flag value (01H) is set. As a result of this confirmation, if the jackpot flag value (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5203. On the other hand, if the big hit flag value (01H) is not set (No), that is, if the small hit flag value (01H) is set, the main control CPU72 then executes step S5204.

Step S5203: The main control CPU 72 executes a big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the winning symbol at the time of the big win is set based on the symbol-specific opening pattern setting table at the time of the big win. The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is set based on the small winning symbol opening pattern setting table. The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5205: After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process, and returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of big winning. The contents will be described below according to the procedure example.

Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the role product continuous operation device. It is a device that can operate the variable winning device 31 continuously. In addition, the "condition device" and the "accessory continuous operation device" can also be used as flags for control. Therefore, as long as this condition device is not operating, it means that the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate in the jackpot game. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5212.

Step S5212: The main control CPU 72 sets "big win start (during jackpot game)" as an internal state flag for control. In addition, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation count status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, a value representing "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. A state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5214.

Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol at the time of the big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the jackpot symbol-by-symbol opening pattern setting table, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol type related to the special symbol. Here, the opening pattern represents the setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, for example, the number of execution rounds, opening time, interval time, and the like. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5216.

[Opening pattern setting table for each pattern at the time of jackpot]
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of an opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of a big hit. The opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit defines the opening and closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 30 or second variable winning device 31) to be operated for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol. is. Specifically, the opening patterns of the following big winning openings are determined for each winning symbol.

[1st winning pattern]
The variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30 when it corresponds to the first winning symbol. The number of rounds to be executed is 10 rounds, 10 of which are rounds with balls. The opening time for opening the first big winning hole 30b is 29.0 seconds per round in the round with balls. Also, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the first winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 is operated for 29.0 seconds during each round from the 1st round to the 10th round. It operates to open the first big winning hole 30b (however, it is closed when the upper limit number of balls is confirmed. The same applies hereinafter). Therefore, when the first winning symbol is obtained, it is possible to substantially obtain balls for 10 rounds.

[Second winning pattern]
The variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30 when it corresponds to the second winning symbol. The number of rounds to be executed is 10 rounds, 10 of which are rounds with balls. The opening time for opening the first big winning hole 30b is 29.0 seconds per round in the round with balls. Also, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the second winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 is operated for 29.0 seconds during each round from the first round to the tenth round. It operates to open the first big prize winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the second winning symbol is obtained, it is possible to obtain balls for 10 rounds.

[3rd winning pattern]
The variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30 when the winning symbol corresponds to the third winning symbol. The number of rounds to be executed is 10 rounds, 10 of which are rounds with balls. The opening time for opening the first big winning hole 30b is 29.0 seconds per round in the round with balls. Also, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the third winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 is operated for 29.0 seconds during each round from the first round to the tenth round. It operates to open the first big prize winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the third winning symbol is obtained, it is possible to obtain balls for 10 rounds.

[4th winning pattern]
The variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30 when it corresponds to the fourth winning symbol. The number of rounds to be executed is 10 rounds, 10 of which are rounds with balls. The opening time for opening the first big winning hole 30b is 29.0 seconds per round in the round with balls. Also, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the fourth winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 is operated for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the tenth round during each round. It operates to open the first big prize winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the winning symbol corresponds to the fourth winning symbol, it is possible to obtain balls for 10 rounds.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the type of winning symbol by referring to the symbol-by-symbol opening pattern setting table at the time of the big win.

[See FIG. 33: Big Winning Opening Pattern Setting Process for Big Win]
Step S<b>5216 : The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30 . Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated in each round (first round to final round) during the jackpot game to the first variable winning device 30 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. do. In the present embodiment, the opening patterns corresponding to the winning symbols (first winning symbols to third winning symbols) at the time of all the big hits are the first round to the final round, so that the first big winning opening 30b is opened. The operation of the first variable winning device 30 is set. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5218.

Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game based on the release pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. For example, 10 rounds are set as the number of execution rounds of the opening pattern corresponding to the 10-land jackpot. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5220.

Step S5220: The main control CPU 72 sets a jackpot time open timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) per time when opening the big winning opening for each round at the time of the big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the release time of the release pattern corresponding to the winning symbols (first to third winning symbols) at the time of the big win. For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first big winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for rounds with balls. Therefore, if the value of the open timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the open time is a sufficient time (for example, launch 10 or more game balls are shot by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the opening timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is the time during which it is difficult for the ball to enter the first big winning hole 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5222.

Step S5222: The main control CPU 72 sets an interval timer at the time of the big hit. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the waiting time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of the big hit. In the present embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer for the release patterns corresponding to all winning symbols (first to third winning symbols) at the time of the big win. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set after the opening of the first big prize opening 30b between the first round and the second round is completed and the opening is temporarily closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5224.

Step S5224: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5218). For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "10 rounds", so the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous actuation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 32).

[Processing for setting the pattern of opening the big winning opening at the time of the small hit]
FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure for setting a pattern for opening a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S5252: The main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (during small hit game)" as an internal state flag for control. Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that a small hit game is in progress. The state command indicating that the small winning game is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5254.

Step S5254: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit opening pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the small hit opening pattern setting table and selects an opening pattern. Here, the opening pattern represents the setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, for example, the number of times of opening, the opening time, the interval time, the opening time of the specific area 31x, etc. ing. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5256.

[Small hit opening pattern setting table]
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a small hit opening pattern setting table. This small hit opening pattern setting table defines the opening and closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (second variable winning device 31). In this embodiment, one opening pattern is set at the time of a small hit, but a plurality of opening patterns may be set for each winning symbol.

The second variable winning device 31 is activated when a small hit is achieved. Also, the number of times the second variable winning device 31 is opened is two times, and the opening time for one time is 0.9 seconds. Note that the interval time is set to, for example, about 1.0 second.

The opening start time of the specific area 31x (the timing of turning ON the specific area solenoid 99 and operating the specific area slide member 31c) is 0.2 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31 is started.
In addition, the opening end time of the specific area 31x (timing to turn off the specific area solenoid 99 and deactivate the specific area slide member 31c) is 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31 is started. .

[See FIG. 35: Big Winning Opening Pattern Setting Process for Small Hits]
Step S 5256 : The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the second variable winning device 31 . Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated during the small winning game to the second variable winning device 31 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small winning. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5258.

Step S5258: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of opening times to be executed during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In addition, in this embodiment, two times is set as the number of openings of the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5260.

Step S5260: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit opening timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) per time when opening the big winning opening based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, 0.9 seconds is set based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5262.

Step S5262: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the waiting time (interval timer) between the opening of the big winning opening based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. Note that in this embodiment, the interval timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 second). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5264.

Step S5264: The main control CPU 72 sets an opening timer for the specific area 31x (specific area slide member 31c). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) of the specific area 31x during the small winning game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small winning. In this embodiment, the specific area 31x is opened 0.2 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31 is started, and the specific area 31x is closed 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31 is started. be done.

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 32).

[Grand prize opening opening/closing operation processing]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening/closing operation process. This processing is mainly for controlling the opening and closing operations of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. FIG. The procedure will be described below.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current internal state is "in duty". Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer of the RAM 76, and determines whether the current internal state is " Check whether or not the status is “In a big role”. It should be noted that the "during a big win (during a jackpot game)" flag is set by the main control CPU 72 during the previous process (during the process of setting the big winning opening pattern at the time of the big win: step S5212) or during the process when passing through a specific area to be described later. . As a result of this confirmation, if the current internal state is "during heavy duty" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5306. On the other hand, if the current internal state is not "during heavy duty" (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes the second big winning opening opening/closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the second variable winning device 31 to open and close the second large winning opening 31b based on the set opening pattern (apply to the second large winning opening solenoid 97 output a drive signal). The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S5306: The main control CPU 72 executes the first big winning opening opening/closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the first variable winning device 30 to open and close the first big winning hole 30b based on the set opening pattern (applies power to the first big winning hole solenoid 90). output a drive signal). The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 31).

[Second Grand Prize Opening Opening/Closing Operation Processing]
FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the second big winning opening opening/closing operation process. The contents will be described below according to the procedure example.

Step S5310: The main control CPU72 opens the second big winning hole 31b. Specifically, it outputs a drive signal to be applied to the second big winning opening solenoid 97 . As a result, the second variable prize winning device 31 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. In addition, when this process is executed, the main control CPU 72 can transmit an opening command at the time of a small hit to the effect control device 124 . It is preferable to transmit the opening command at the time of the small win only once during the small win.

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 executes open timer countdown processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 counts down the opening timer set in the previous process (steps S5260 and S5264 of the small winning big winning opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 35)). In addition, in this process, in addition to the opening timer for opening the second big winning hole 31b, the opening timer (opening start time, opening end time) for opening the specific area 31x is counted down. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5314.

Step S5314: The main control CPU 72 executes specific area opening/closing operation processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the specific area slide member 31c to open and close the specific area 31x based on the set opening pattern (outputs a drive signal to be applied to the specific area solenoid 99). process. The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5316.

Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the second big winning opening 31b has ended. Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the open timer for the second big winning opening 31b during the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, if the opening time of the second big winning hole 31b has ended (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5322. On the other hand, if the opening time of the second big winning hole 31b has not ended (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 executes winning ball count processing. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the second variable winning device 31 (the large winning opening during opening) is counted within the opening time. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count based on the winning detection signal input from the second count switch 85 within the open time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5320.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of prize-winning balls (upper limit of the number of prize-winning balls) permissible per opening at the time of a small hit, as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at this stage, so the main control CPU 72 repeats the above steps S5310 to S5320.

If it is determined that the opening time has ended in step S5316 (Yes), or if it is confirmed that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5320 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5322. In addition, since the value of the open timer is set to a short time (for example, 1.8 seconds) for opening at the time of the small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally detects that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5310. In most cases, it is determined in step S5316 that the open time has expired before confirmation.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 closes the second big winning opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the driving signal applied to the second big winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5324.

Step S5324: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the specific area passage flag is ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and confirms whether or not the specific area passage flag is ON based on whether the value of the specific area passage flag is 01H. As a result of this confirmation, when the specific area passing flag is ON (Yes), that is, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second big winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main Control CPU 72 then executes step S5326. On the other hand, if the specific area passing flag is not ON (No), that is, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 31x while the second big winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main control The CPU 72 then executes step S5327a. It should be noted that there is a possibility that the specific area passing flag will be set to ON during the previous specific area opening/closing operation process (step S5314).

Step S5326: The main control CPU 72 executes specific area passage processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 activates the condition device and the accessory continuous operating device based on the game ball passing through the specific area 31x while the second big winning hole 31b is open during the small winning game. , the process of continuously operating the first variable winning device 30, that is, the process of starting the jackpot game is executed (special game executing means via special game, special game executing means). The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5327a: The main control CPU 72 executes interval standby processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the previous process (step S5262 of the small winning big winning opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 35)). When the interval timer value becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5327b. Although not particularly shown here, until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0), the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the calling source from step S5327a for each interrupt. Return to the end address of the process (FIG. 31). Then, when the big winning opening opening/closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5327a is executed directly instead of from the top step S5310.

Step S5327b: The main control CPU72 increments the value of the counter for the number of openings of the second big winning opening. The value of the counter for the number of openings of the second big winning opening is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

Step S5327c: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the incremented second big winning opening open number counter has reached the number set in the current round. Here, the reason why ``the number of times set in the current round'' is determined is to correspond to the opening pattern of ``opening the second variable winning device 31 a plurality of times during one small winning'', for example. is. In addition, especially when such an opening pattern is not adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round, so the counter value will increase with one opening and closing operation. Since the set number of times is reached (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5328.

On the other hand, in the case of adopting the release pattern of ``opening the second variable winning device 31 multiple times during one small win'', the counter value still reaches the set number of times when one opening is completed. (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5310 to S5327b are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the opening number counter progresses in step S5327b, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (step S5327c; Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5328.

Step S5328: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening closing process, and returns to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process (FIG. 37). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 next executes the big winning opening closing process.

[Specific Area Opening/Closing Operation Processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the specific area opening/closing operation process. The contents will be described below according to the procedure example.

Step S5330: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has started. Specifically, the main control CPU72 counts down in the countdown process (step S5312) By confirming whether the value of the open timer for the opening start time related to opening the specific area 31x is 0, the specific area Check if the 31x open time has started. As a result of this confirmation, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has started (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5332. On the other hand, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has not started (No), or if it has already been opened, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5334.

Step S5332: The main control CPU72 releases the specific area 31x. Specifically, it outputs a drive signal to be applied to the specific area solenoid 99 . As a result, the specific area slide member 31c is actuated to shift the specific area 31x from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5334: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the storage area of the RAM 76 and checks whether or not the specific area reserve flag is ON. As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is ON and the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5336. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the specific area preliminary flag is OFF and the game ball has not passed through the specific area 31x (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5338.

Step S5336: The main control CPU72 sets the specific area passage flag to ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and sets the value of the specific area passage flag to 01H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5338. It should be noted that the specific area passing flag and the specific area spare flag are reset at the end of the big hit game.

Step S5338: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has ended. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the value of the open timer related to the opening of the specific area 31x counted down in the countdown process (step S5312) is 0, so that the opening time of the specific area 31x is Check if it is finished. As a result of this confirmation, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has ended (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5340. On the other hand, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has not ended (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the second big winning opening opening/closing operation process (FIG. 38).

Step S5340: The main control CPU72 closes the specific area 31x. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the specific area solenoid 99 is stopped. As a result, the specific-region slide member 31c returns from the open state (operating state) to the closed state (non-operating state).

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second big winning opening opening/closing operation process (FIG. 38).

[Processing when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure for processing when passing through a specific area. The contents will be described below according to the procedure example.

Step S5350: The main control CPU72 resets the small hit flag. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and resets the value of the small hit flag to 00H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5352.

Step S5352: The main control CPU72 terminates the small hit game. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 erases "during small winning game" from the internal state flag, and ends the small winning game on the control process (end of small winning). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5354.

Step S5354: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 can be operated continuously, and a big win game can be started. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5356.

Step S5356: The main control CPU 72 sets "big win start (during jackpot game)" as an internal state flag for control. In addition, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation count status according to the type of winning symbol. For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, a value representing "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. A state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5358.

Step S5358: The main control CPU 72 executes the pattern-specific release pattern selection process when passing through a specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the pattern-specific opening pattern setting table when passing through a specific area, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol when a small hit is achieved. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5360.

Step S5360: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 operates a variable prize winning device for each round (second round to final round) during the big win game based on the release pattern corresponding to the special symbol when the small win is won. The type is set to the first variable winning device 30 . The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5362.

Step S5362: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game, based on the release pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is achieved. For example, "10 rounds" is set as the number of execution rounds of the release pattern corresponding to the fifth winning symbol. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5364.

Step S5364: The main control CPU 72 sets an opening timer for the big hit. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) per time when opening the big winning opening for each round at the time of the big hit. In the present embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbols (fourth winning symbol to sixth winning symbol) related to the special symbols when a small hit is made. For example, in the case of the fourth winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first big winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for rounds with balls. Therefore, if the value of the open timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the open time is a sufficient time (for example, launch 10 or more game balls are shot by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the opening timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is the time during which it is difficult for the ball to enter the first big winning hole 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5366.

Step S5366: The main control CPU 72 sets a jackpot time interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the waiting time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of the big hit. In the present embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer of the release pattern corresponding to the winning symbol when a small win is achieved. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 seconds is set after the opening of the first big prize opening 30b between the second round and the third round is completed and the opening is once closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5368.

Step S5368: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5362). For example, in the case of the fifth winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "10 rounds", so the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous actuation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5370.

Step S5370: The main control CPU 72 executes the pattern-specific time reduction function setting process when passing through the specific area. In this process, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol at the time of the small hit is the "fifth winning symbol", the main control CPU72 sets the time shortening function operation flag to ON (time shortening state transition means, time shortening function activation means, state transition means).

By executing such a process, the main control CPU72, when winning with the winning symbol that shifts to the time reduction state (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), changes from the non-time reduction state (first state) to the time reduction state ( second state) (state transition means).

Step S5372: The main control CPU 72 executes special fluctuation number setting processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of special variations of the first special symbol and the number of special variations of the second special symbol according to the winning symbol. Specific numerical values of the number of special fluctuations are as described in FIGS. 26 to 29. FIG.

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the address at the end of the second big winning opening opening/closing operation process (FIG. 38).

[Open pattern setting table for each pattern when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of an opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. The pattern-specific opening pattern setting table at the time of passing through the specific area defines the opening/closing operation pattern of the first variable prize winning device 30 for each round for each different winning pattern related to the special pattern when a small win is achieved. Specifically, the opening patterns of the following big winning openings are determined for each winning symbol.

[5th winning pattern]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30. FIG. Also, the number of execution rounds is 10 rounds. Since the number of executed rounds includes the operation of the second variable prize winning device 31 which is opened by the small win, the jackpot game to be started from now on will have 9 rounds, which is 10 rounds minus 1 round. It becomes the number of rounds in a substantial jackpot game (the same applies to the sixth winning pattern below). The opening time for opening the first big winning opening 30b per round in each round is 29.0 seconds. Also, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning pattern related to the special symbol at the time of the small win is the fifth winning pattern, when the big win game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small win is regarded as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable prize winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first big prize winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 9 rounds worth of balls.

[6th winning pattern]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the sixth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30.例文帳に追加Also, the number of execution rounds is 10 rounds (the substantial number of rounds in the jackpot game is 9 rounds). The opening time for opening the first big winning opening 30b per round in each round is 29.0 seconds. Also, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning pattern related to the special symbol at the time of the small win is the sixth winning pattern, when the big win game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small win is regarded as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable prize winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first big prize winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the sixth winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially nine rounds worth of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 refers to the pattern-specific opening pattern setting table when passing through the specific area, and sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit occurs. It will be done.

[1st Grand Prize Opening Opening/Closing Operation Processing]
FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the first big winning opening opening/closing operation process. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S5380: The main control CPU72 opens the first big winning hole 30b. Specifically, it outputs a drive signal to be applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 . As a result, the first variable prize winning device 30 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5382. In addition, when this process is executed, the main control CPU 72 can transmit an opening command at the time of the big hit to the effect control device 124 . It is preferable to transmit the opening command at the time of the big win only once during the big win.

Step S5382: The main control CPU 72 executes open timer countdown processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 set in the previous process (step S5220 of the big winning opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 33) at the time of the big hit, or step S5364 in the specific area passing process (in FIG. 40)) Run the open timer countdown. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5386.

Step S5386: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the first big winning opening 30b has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the first big winning hole 30b after the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, if the opening time of the first big winning hole 30b has ended (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5392. On the other hand, if the opening time of the first big winning hole 30b has not ended (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5388.

Step S5388: The main control CPU 72 executes winning ball count processing. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the first variable prize winning device 30 (the large prize winning opening that is open) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the open time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5390.

Step S5390: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of prize balls) allowed per opening (one round during a big win) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at this stage, so the main control CPU 72 repeats the above steps S5380 to S5390.

If it is determined that the opening time has ended in step S5386 (Yes), or if it is confirmed that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5390 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5392. If the value of the open timer is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the main control CPU 72 normally performs step S5390 before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number. In most cases, it is determined in S5386 that the open time has ended.

Step S5392: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big winning opening 30b. Specifically, the output of the driving signal applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5394.

Step S5394: The main control CPU 72 executes interval standby processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 set in the previous process (step S5222 of the big winning opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 33) at the time of the big hit, or step S5366 in the specific area passing process (in FIG. 40)) Execute the interval timer countdown. When the interval timer value becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5395. Although not particularly shown here, until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0), the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the caller from step S5394 for each interrupt. Return to the end address of the process (FIG. 31). Then, when the big winning opening opening/closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5394 is executed directly instead of from the top step S5380.

Step S5395: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. The value of the open number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

Step S5396: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open number counter after increment has reached the number set in the current round. Here, the reason why ``the number of times set in the current round'' is determined is to correspond to the opening pattern of, for example, ``opening the first variable winning device 30 multiple times in one round during the jackpot''. is. In this embodiment, since such an opening pattern is not particularly adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round. Therefore, since the counter value usually reaches the set number of times in one opening/closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5398 next.

If a pattern is adopted in which opening and closing operations are repeated a plurality of times within one round as described above, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening operation (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5380 to S5390 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening counter is incremented in step S5395, and when the counter value reaches the set number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5398.

Step S5398: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening closing process, and returns to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process (FIG. 37). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 next executes the big winning opening closing process.

[Grand Prize Opening Closing Process]
FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening closing process. This big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. The procedure will be described below.

Step S5401: First, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the current game is in a big win (jackpot game), and if it is in a big win (Yes), the main control CPU72 next executes step S5402.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the first round is completed, and the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage toward the second round. When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game and the big winning game is started after the small winning is finished, the opening of the second big winning opening 31b at the time of the small winning is treated as the first round, and the big winning is won. The first round in which play is started is treated as the second round.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the incremented round number counter has reached the set execution round number. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the incremented round number counter value (1 to 15), and if the value is less than the set execution round number (14 or 15 after subtracting 1) ( No), then step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current round number based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 31), the main control CPU 72 executes the big winning opening opening/closing operation process, which is the next jump destination. After executing the large winning opening opening/closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the large winning opening closing process again after executing the large winning opening closing process, and repeats the above steps S5402 to S5408. As a result, the opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is continuously performed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds.

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

Steps S5410, S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (=0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to end processing.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[At the time of small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation executing means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not in a big role (step S5401: No), it increments the value of the opening number counter.

Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open number counter after incrementing has reached the set open number. The number of times of opening is set in the previous big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of small winning (step S5258 in FIG. 35). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 31), the main control CPU 72 executes the big winning opening opening/closing operation process, which is the next jump destination. Then, after executing the large winning opening opening/closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the large winning opening closing process through the execution of the large winning opening closing process, and executes the above step S5401 to step S5413 (No), and then step S5416. , step S5408 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening/closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of times of opening.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5414.

Steps S5414, S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (=0) the open number counter, the next jump destination is set to end processing.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of termination processing. This ending process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 . An example procedure will be described below.

Step S5501a: The main control CPU 72 executes end time timer countdown processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value to the end time timer, and then counts down the timer (each time this module is called) as time elapses.

Step S5501b: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time (ending time) has passed. Specifically, if the value of the end time timer has not yet reached 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the end time has not passed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 terminates this module and returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 31).

After that, when the value of the end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the end time has passed (Yes), and executes the processing after step S5502.
As for the end time, different times may be set for the big win and the small win.

Step S5502: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set, and if the value of the jackpot flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU72 next executes step S5503. do.

Step S5503, step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit game state ends in the control processing of the main control CPU 72 . In addition, the main control CPU 72 erases "during a big hit" from the internal state flag here, and ends the big win game on the control process (end of the big win). The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction function activation flag is 01H (set). This flag is set during the previous special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2414 in FIG. 19) during the big hit and other setting processing (step S2414 in FIG. 19), and during the previous specific area passing processing during the passing of the specific area, the symbol-specific time reduction function setting processing (Fig. This is set in step S5370 in 40).

Step S5512: And, when the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the number of times of time reduction (for example, 1 time (or 10 times)). The set value of the number of times of time saving is stored in the time saving count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The time saving frequency set here becomes the upper limit frequency for shortening the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. In the present embodiment, in order to manage the number of times of time saving, the number of times cutting counter values (first times cutting counter value, second times cutting counter value) related to two types of time saving states are prepared. Here, the first cut counter value is a variable that is decremented each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates once, and is set to "10" as an initial value. Also, the second cut counter value is a variable that is decremented (subtracted by 1) each time the second special symbol fluctuates once, and is set to "1" as an initial value. If the value of the time reduction function activation flag is not 01H (step S5510: No), the main control CPU72 does not execute steps S5512 and S5513.

By executing such processing, the main control CPU72, when the conditions for shifting to the time reduction state are satisfied (when the predetermined transition conditions are satisfied, when winning with winning symbols to shift to the time reduction state ), after the end of the jackpot game, from the non-time-reduced state (predetermined game state), favorable conditions were applied compared to the non-time-reduced state (the fluctuation time of the normal symbol lottery was shortened, and the variable start winning device It is possible to shift to a time shortening state (advantageous game state) in which the open time is extended (advantageous game state transition means).

Step S5513: The main control CPU 72 executes special fluctuation number setting processing. This process is the same as the process of step S5372 in FIG.

The procedure up to this point is for the case of a big hit, but in the case of a small hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

Step S5520, step S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and erases "in play" from the internal state flag. It should be noted that in the case of a small win, such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag, especially since the internal conditioning device is not activated.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on the flag. Specifically, in accordance with the reset of the jackpot flag or the end of the big win, a state designation command representing "normal" as the game state is generated. Also, if the time reduction function activation flag is set, it generates a state designation command indicating "time reduction" as the internal state. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 18) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol variation pre-process. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Game Flow (Part 1)]
FIG. 45 is a diagram explaining the game flow developed when the first special symbol changes in the normal mode.
When a game is started with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from [F1] normal mode (park mode). "Normal mode" is a "non-reduced time state".

[F1] When a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26 during a game in the normal mode, [F2] the first special symbol changes.

[F3] If the first special symbol lottery results in a "loss", the state of [F1] normal mode is restarted.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and [F5] the first winning symbol is obtained, [F6] a big winning game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode. [F8] The drive mode is a "time reduction state".

[F4] If the first special symbol lottery results in a "jackpot (winning probability 1/319)" and [F7] the second winning symbol is obtained, [F6] a jackpot game is executed, and [F9] shifts to the animal mode. [F9] The animal mode is a "non-shortening state". The variation pattern of [F9] animal mode may be different from that of [F1] normal mode, or may be the same as that of [F1] normal mode.

[Game Flow (Part 2)]
FIG. 46 is a diagram explaining the game flow developed when the second special symbol changes in the drive mode in the time shortening state.
[F8] When the game ball enters the right start winning hole 28b during the game in the drive mode in the time shortening state (if the memory of the second special symbol exists), [F12] the second special symbol is displayed. fluctuate.

[F13] If the 2nd special symbol lottery results in a "big win (winning probability 1/319)" and [F14] the third winning symbol is obtained, [F6] a big win game is executed, and [F8] time-reduced drive mode. transition to

[F13] If the 2nd special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and [F15] corresponds to the 4th winning symbol, [F6] a big winning game is executed, and [F20] drive in a non-reduced time state. mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in "small win (winning probability 318/319)", [F17] corresponds to the fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and [F8] the drive mode is shifted to a time reduction state.

[F16] In the second special symbol lottery, it becomes "small win (winning probability 318/319)", [F19] corresponds to the 6th winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and [F20] the drive mode is shifted to a non-reduced time state.

[Game Flow (Part 3)]
FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the game flow developed when the second special symbol changes in the drive mode in the non-shortening state.
[F20] When the game ball enters the right start winning hole 28b during the game in the drive mode in the non-reduced time state (if the memory of the second special symbol exists), [F12] Second special symbol fluctuates.

[F13] If the 2nd special symbol lottery results in a "big win (winning probability 1/319)" and [F14] the third winning symbol is obtained, [F6] a big win game is executed, and [F8] time-reduced drive mode. transition to

[F13] If the 2nd special symbol lottery results in a "big win (winning probability 1/319)" and [F15] corresponds to the 4th winning symbol, [F6] a big win game is executed, and [F9] shifts to the animal mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in "small win (winning probability 318/319)", [F17] corresponds to the fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and [F8] the drive mode is shifted to a time reduction state.

[F16] In the second special symbol lottery, it becomes "small win (winning probability 318/319)", [F19] corresponds to the 6th winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and [F9] the game shifts to the animal mode.

Thus, in the present embodiment, once entering the time reduction state (continuous state), a total of 2 with the change of the second special symbol for one time reduction and the memory of one second special symbol. It is possible to obtain an opportunity for a hit (big hit or small hit). Then, when winning with winning symbols with time reduction in either of the two opportunities, the game has a game characteristic of returning to the time reduction state (continuous state) again.

[Game Flow (Part 4)]
FIG. 48 is a diagram explaining the game flow developed when the first special symbol changes in the animal mode.
[F9] When the game ball enters the medium start winning hole 26 during the game in the animal mode, [F2] the first special symbol changes.

[F3] "Loss" in the first special symbol lottery, and when such "losing" continues for a specified number of times (for example, 15 fluctuations are executed), [F20] the prescribed fluctuation progresses, and [F1] Switch to normal mode. If the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit", the same game flow as in FIG. 45 is performed.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 and the operation of the drum unit 200 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the jackpot internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (symbol display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol themselves are lighting/blinking display by the 7-segment LED, they lack visual appeal. Similarly, the aspect of the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 is also a symbolic design such as a 7-segment LED. It lacks visual impact as a winning design. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect and a stop display effect using the liquid crystal display 42 and the drum unit 200 are performed.

In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 42 displays the effect pattern Hz (main pattern), the marker M1, the marker M2, the fourth patterns Z1 and Z2, the background image corresponding to the stay mode, the image related to the advance notice effect, and the like. , the drum unit 200 displays pseudo performance symbols such as 7 symbols.

The effect pattern Hz displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 includes, for example, three patterns of a left effect pattern, a middle effect pattern, and a right effect pattern. displayed side by side. Numbers "1" to "9" are displayed in each of the performance symbols. Here, the left effect pattern, the middle effect pattern, and the right effect pattern constitute a pattern sequence (effect pattern array) in which the numbers "9" to "1" are arranged in descending order. Such pattern rows are variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction.

The pseudo effect symbols displayed on the drum unit 200 include three pseudo left effect symbols displayed on the left reel 201, pseudo medium effect symbols displayed on the middle reel 202, and pseudo right effect symbols displayed on the right reel 203. These are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the display area of the drum unit 200 . Each reel includes 7 symbols, a panda symbol, and a cherry symbol, and the pseudo performance symbols are variably displayed by rotating each reel.

49 and 50 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effect images corresponding to variable display and stop display of special symbols. Here, an example of a variable display effect and a stop display effect performed using the liquid crystal display 42 and the drum unit 200 is shown for the variation of the special symbol when the winning is not won (lost). This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) and the stop display (including the fixed stop). Further, the stop display effect is a effect showing that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is displayed. Here, before describing the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the variable display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described first.

[Before change display]
(A) in FIG. 49: For example, in the state before the first special symbol starts to change (the state in which the demo effect is not in progress), three lines of the effect symbol Hz are displayed in the area on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display 42. is displayed. At this time, according to the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol Hz is also stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the lower left area of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (marked with reference signs M1 and M2 in the figure) are displayed to indicate the working memory numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. ing. These markers M1 and M2 correspond to the first special symbol and the second special symbol working memory number (the number of display of the first special symbol working memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol working memory lamp 35a). The displayed number increases or decreases in conjunction with the change in the number of working memories during the game. In order to facilitate visual discrimination, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed, for example, as a circle (o), and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed, for example, as a heart. is displayed in the form of In the illustrated example, when all four markers M1 are illuminated, it means that the working memory number of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are hidden (indicated by broken lines). indicates that the working memory number of the second special symbol is zero. In addition, since the maximum value of the working memory number of the second special symbol is one, only one marker M2 is illuminated at maximum.

In addition, a fourth pattern (reference symbols Z1 and Z2 are attached in the drawing) is displayed in the lower right area of the liquid crystal display 42 . The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the left, middle and right effect symbols, and are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the effect symbol Hz. The fourth patterns Z1 and Z2 are simply colored marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and by changing the display color, for example, a variable display can be expressed. The fourth design Z1 corresponds to the first special design, and the fourth design Z2 corresponds to the second special design.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the failure. This is to objectively clarify that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally, and that the stop display effect is correctly performed in response to the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually a "big win" or a "minor win" instead of "lose", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are displayed in a mode corresponding to them (for example, blue display color, red display color, etc.). is stopped.

On the other hand, on the active line in the middle of the drum unit 200, a "panda pattern" corresponding to "missing" is displayed.

[Variation display effect start]
(B) in FIG. 49: For example, each reel of the drum unit 200 starts rotating in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the effect symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls and fluctuates to produce a variable display effect. is started (symbol effect executing means). In the figure, the variable display of the pseudo performance symbols of the drum unit 200 and the variable display of the performance symbols Hz are simply indicated by downward arrows.

A background image is displayed in the central area of the liquid crystal display 42, and this background image expresses the landscape of the park. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in presentation is, for example, the "normal mode". "Normal mode" is a non-time reduction state. In addition to this, various modes are provided for production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode. These mode differences correspond to internal "time reduction states". Although not particularly shown here, after this, for example, an image of a character, an item, or the like may be displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, so that an advance notice effect is performed.

Further, during the variable display of the production pattern Hz, the fourth pattern Z1 is displayed in a variable manner at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth pattern Z1 expresses the variable display by changing its display color. .

[Left production design stop]
(C) in FIG. 49: For example, after a certain amount of time (approximately half the fluctuation time) has passed, first, the pseudo left effect pattern of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200 and the left effect of the effect pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 are displayed. The pattern stops changing. In this example, "7 green symbols" are stopped at the middle position of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200 as the pseudo left effect symbol, and the number "8" is displayed as the left effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42. The production pattern to represent is stopped.

[Example of production when the number of working memories is reduced]
Here, as shown in FIG. 49 (B) above, since the number of working memories of the oldest first special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, the leftmost position in conjunction with it The number of displayed markers M1 that had been displayed is reduced by one. That is, until then, the working memory number of the marker M1 was four in total, but the marker M1, which is the display of the memory number of the earliest (oldest) memory, is hidden, and an effect that is consumed by internal lottery is performed. will be As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the total number of working memories has been reduced to 3, and the working memory corresponding to any special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol) is consumed. It is possible to teach in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the example of (C) in FIG. 49, since the working memory at the top in the order of storage is consumed and the number remaining is three, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are aligned one by one. An effect of shifting in the direction (here, leftward) is performed. As a result, it is possible to accurately express the context of the change in the number of working memories in the performance, and to instruct the player in an intuitive and easy-to-understand manner that "the number of working memories has been consumed and one has decreased". can.

[Right production pattern stop]
(D) in FIG. 50: Next, a "panda symbol" is stopped as a pseudo right effect symbol at the middle position of the right reel 203 of the drum unit 200, and a number is displayed as a right effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42. The production pattern representing "3" is stopped.

[Stop display effect]
(E) in FIG. 50: A stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. When the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (losing) mode, the pseudo performance symbols on the drum unit 200 and the performance symbols Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 are the same. , a stop display effect is performed in a non-winning (lost) mode. That is, in the illustrated example, a "panda symbol" as a pseudo medium effect symbol is stopped at the middle position of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200, and the number "1" is displayed as a medium effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42. The production pattern representing is stopped. In this case, the combination of the simulated performance symbols displayed on the middle effective line of the drum unit 200 is the misalignment of "seven green symbols" - "panda design" - "panda design", which is the performance design of the liquid crystal display 42. Since the combination of Hz is "8" - "1" - "3", it is expressed in the production that this change corresponds to the usual "missing". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stop-displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the loss.

The above is an example of the variable display effect and the stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed for each variation. Through such an effect, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for winning, and to clearly teach the result of the internal lottery in the effect.

[Example of production at the time of a big hit]
51 to 53 are continuous diagrams showing the flow of the ready-to-win effect executed at the time of the big hit. Here, in addition to the ready-to-win effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and an advance notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the notice effect (pre-notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach occur) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

In the following ready-to-win effect, for example, the first special symbol is the "first winning symbol" or the "second winning symbol" after the variation display according to the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is performed on the first special symbol display device 34. (For example, the 7-segment LED "self", "yo", "mouth", "mi", "F", "E", "L", "Γ", etc.) reach production execution means).

[Variation display effect]
(A) in FIG. 51: Almost in synchronism with the start of variation of the first special symbol (or second special symbol), each reel of the drum unit 200 starts rotating, and the effect symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls and fluctuates. By doing so, the variable display effect is started.

[Advance notice before the occurrence of reach (1st stage)]
(B) in FIG. 51: After a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the liquid crystal display 42 performs the first-stage ready-to-win pre-occurrence effect using a picture card (picture card) of the character. This advance notice effect before the occurrence of ready-to-win is a notice effect in which changes in mode progress in stages from one step to a plurality of steps (for example, two to five steps) in accordance with a predetermined order. The pattern image used in the advance notice effect before occurrence of the ready-to-win is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen (other modes of appearance may be used). Note that the "notice before occurrence of reach" is an effect that foretells the possibility of reach or the possibility of a big hit. By executing such a "pre-notice effect before occurrence of ready-to-win", it is possible to obtain the effect of making the player feel a sense of expectation that "the game may develop into a ready-to-win = the possibility of a big win increases".

[Notice production before reaching (second stage)]
(C) in FIG. 51: After the first stage of the advance notice effect before the occurrence of the ready-to-win situation is executed, the change in the form of the notice effect before the occurrence of the ready-to-win situation progresses to the second stage. Here, as the second-stage pre-notice production before the occurrence of reach, a production using a picture image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed overlapping the front of the previously displayed pattern image. Moreover, the pattern image displayed at this time is larger in size than the pattern image previously displayed. In addition, the character represented by the pattern image utters a line (for example, "I'm going to be a reach", etc.).

The advance notice effect before the occurrence of reach (second stage) using such a second pattern image is a step further from the notice effect before occurrence of reach (first stage) performed in (B) of FIG. It is an advanced type. The aspect of the "pre-notice effect before the occurrence of reach" that develops in this way is generally referred to as "step-up notice" or the like. Here is an example in which the 2nd stage pattern image appears in the advance notice effect before the occurrence of reach, but in the production mode in which the 3rd, 4th, and 5th stage pattern images appear one after another and are displayed There may be. Further, for example, the size may be increased each time the third, fourth, and fifth stage pattern images appear one after another and are displayed. Note that the variable display effect is continued even at this stage. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) of a big win with this change by allowing the change in the state of the advance notice effect before the occurrence of the ready-to-win to proceed to more stages. (For example, progress to level 5 suggests maximum expectations, etc.).

[Stop the left direction pattern]
(D) in FIG. 52: In the middle of the variable display effect, the pseudo left effect pattern of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200 and the left effect pattern of the effect pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 stop varying. In this example, "7 red symbols" are stopped at the middle position of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200 as the pseudo left effect symbol, and the number "7" is displayed as the left effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42. The production pattern to represent is stopped.

[Occurrence of reach state]
(E) in FIG. 52: Next, the simulated right effect pattern of the right reel 203 of the drum unit 200 and the right effect pattern of the effect pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 stop changing. In this example, "7 red symbols" are stopped at the middle position of the right reel 203 of the drum unit 200 as the pseudo right effect symbol, and the number "7" is displayed as the right effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42. The production pattern to represent is stopped. As a result, in the pseudo production pattern of the drum unit 200, the ready-to-reach state of "7 red patterns" - "fluctuating" - "7 red patterns" has occurred, and in the production pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42, "7 ”-“fluctuating”-“7” reach state occurs. At the same time, an effect of outputting a voice such as "Reach!" is performed. After the ready-to-win state occurs, the ready-to-win production at the time of winning is executed. It should be noted that the effect pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 may be displayed in the state of "fluctuation"-"fluctuation"-"fluctuation" without generating a clear ready-to-win state.

[Notice production after reaching]
(F) in FIG. 52: Shortly after the reach state has occurred, the liquid crystal display 42 displays a forewarning effect after the reach occurrence, in which images representing, for example, a “heart” figure form a group and pass obliquely across the screen. done. In this case, the images of the "group of hearts" are suddenly displayed on the screen as if they are flowing, thereby enhancing the visual appeal to the player. By executing such a visually lively advance notice effect after occurrence of ready-to-win, an effect of making the player feel a greater sense of expectation can be obtained.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 53 (G): Following the advance notice effect after the occurrence of reach, on the liquid crystal display 42, an enemy character "pumpkin ghost" appears on the left side of the screen, and a friendly character "male character" appears on the right side of the screen. ” appears and the characters “VS” appear in the center of the screen.

(H) in FIG. 53: At the end of the ready-to-win production, the “pumpkin ghost” unleashes countless punches, and the “male character” fights back with chops. In this state, if the "male character" wins, it will be a big hit, and if the "male character" loses, it will be lost.

[Stop display effect (performance when winning)]
(I) in FIG. 53: Together with the characters "Victory!!", "male character" is displayed in a large size, and "pumpkin ghost" is displayed in a small size, which means a big win. Substantially in synchronism with the stop display of the special symbols, the variation of the simulated mid-effect symbols on the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200 and the mid-effect symbols Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 stops. In this example, "7 red symbols" is stopped as the pseudo right effect symbol at the middle position of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200, and the number "7" is displayed as the middle effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42. The production pattern to represent is stopped. The fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to a big hit (for example, red display color).

It should be noted that when the prize is not won (when the prize is lost), the words "defeat..." are displayed together with "pumpkin ghost" in a large size and "male character" in a small size. In this case, the "panda symbol" is stopped as the pseudo right effect symbol at the middle position of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200, and the effect representing a number other than "7" is displayed as the middle effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 in the effect symbol Hz. The pattern is stopped.

[During the big role]
FIGS. 54 and 55 are continuous diagrams partially showing an example of an effect during a big win executed during a big win game. It should be noted that the following effects during the big role are effects executed on the liquid crystal display device 42 .

[Jackpot game start]
(A) in FIG. 54: When a jackpot game is started, for example, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed on the screen, and a unique effect image (for example, a female character) is displayed during the jackpot game. .

["Right-handed" display during heavy duty]
In addition, in this embodiment, since the first variable winning device 30 is arranged in the right part of the game area 8a, the right part of the game area 8a is specified as the shooting position (shooting direction) of the game ball during a big win. I'm doing it. Therefore, under the control of the main control CPU 72 , the firing position designation display lamp 38 f is lit and displayed, and a firing position designation command representing “right hitting” is transmitted to the effect control device 124 . In response to this, guidance information (an arrow indicating the right direction, letters of "right hitting", etc.) is displayed on the display screen to prompt "right hitting" on the effect control by the effect control CPU 126).

[1st round]
(B) in FIG. 54: When the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, text information of "BIG BONUS" and 10 circle marks are displayed in the upper left part of the screen. The leftmost ○ mark is displayed in red (hatched with oblique lines), and the remaining nine ○ marks are displayed in white. As a result, 10 rounds can be obtained, the current round is the first round among those 10 rounds, and a circle mark is displayed each time a ball can be obtained. The player can be instructed to be displayed in red.

[10th round]
(C) in FIG. 54: After that, the jackpot game progresses smoothly, and, for example, when the game shifts to the 10th round, for example, all 10 ◯ marks are displayed in red. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that all the rounds in which the ball can be obtained are completed in the 10th round.

Here, if it corresponds to the winning pattern that shifts to the time shortening state, or if it does not correspond to the winning pattern that shifts to the time shortening state but has the memory of the second special pattern, as shown in the figure. , a fireworks effect (a effect suggesting a shift to the drive mode) in which fireworks are launched is executed. In addition, when it does not correspond to the winning pattern that shifts to the time shortening state, or when there is no memory of the second special pattern, the fireworks effect is not executed. Fireworks production can be executed in any round.

[Time-reduced rushing effect]
(D) in FIG. 55: When shifting to the time shortening state, an effect is executed in which character information such as "enter drive mode!" is displayed using the end time of the jackpot game. Thus, the player can be informed that the "drive mode" is about to start. In addition, an arrow indicating the right direction is displayed together with text information such as ``Keep playing right,'' so that the player can be taught that the game proceeds with hitting right even in the ``drive mode''.

Here, during the ending production, a notification such as "Be careful not to forget to take out the prepaid card" is given to evoke forgetting to take out the prepaid card, or to prevent addiction to the game such as "Be careful not to get addicted to the game". You may make it alert|report.

[Jackpot game end, time shortened]
(E) in FIG. 55: When the jackpot game ends and the internal state (game state) is set to the time reduction state, the stay mode is set to the "drive mode", and the background image is the car in which the woman is riding. It is changed to an image that expresses how it runs on the ground. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the current internal state (game state) is a time reduction state different from the normal state.

[Time-saving production]
In this way, when the game is progressing in the time shortening state, the time-saving middle production (advantageous game state production) for displaying the background image corresponding to the time shortening state (advantageous game state) is executed.

[Right-handed suggestion production]
Also, in the upper part of the screen, an effect suggesting hitting to the right is being executed. In the right-handed suggestion effect, a band-shaped area is provided in the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and right-handed character information and a right-pointing arrow symbol are displayed in the band-shaped area. In addition, such a right hitting suggestion effect is continuously executed when the game state is the time shortening state. By executing such an effect, the player can be urged to "hit to the right".

[Remaining count display effect]
Furthermore, at the bottom left of the screen, the remaining number of times display effect is being executed. In the remaining number display effect, a rectangular area is provided at the bottom left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the remaining number of times that the game can be played in the drive mode is displayed in the rectangular area. In addition, in the example shown in the figure, the information of "two times remaining" is displayed. The remaining number of times is subtracted by 1 each time the second special symbol fluctuates and stops in the time-reduced drive mode or the non-time-reduced drive mode. Therefore, the remaining number of times is not subtracted even if the first special symbol fluctuates and stops in the time shortening state or the non-time shortening state.

[Example of production in drive mode (time reduction state)]
FIGS. 56 to 58 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects in the drive mode.

(A) in FIG. 56: In the drive mode, the background image is changed to an image representing the car in which the woman is riding on the ground. The combination of the pseudo performance symbols displayed on the active line in the middle of the drum unit 200 is the winning combination of ``seven red symbols''-``seven red symbols''-``seven red symbols''. The combination of symbols Hz is a winning item of "7"-"7"-"7". This shows the outcome at the time of winning. Also, in the upper part of the screen, a right-handing suggestion effect is being executed, and such a right-handing suggestion performance is continuously performed when the game state is the time reduction state.
The backlight of the drum unit 200 may emit light in a predetermined color in conjunction with the background image of the liquid crystal.

[Start of fluctuation of special symbols]
(B) in FIG. 56: When the first special symbol is hit for the first time, the memory of the first special symbol is often stored, and the memory of the second special symbol is generally not stored. In the illustrated example, four memories (markers M1) of the first special symbol are accumulated. Therefore, when the drive mode is entered in such a situation, the first special symbol is variably displayed. In addition, when the memory of the first special symbol is not stored, the variation of the second special symbol is first executed by the player executing a right-handed stroke. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the drum unit 200 starts rotating along with it, and the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z1 on the liquid crystal display 42 also start to vary. Here, in the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol, it is assumed that it corresponds to the loss.

[End of variation of the first special symbol]
(C) in FIG. 56: When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost state, the dummy effect symbol of the drum unit 200, the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 of the liquid crystal display 42 are also lost. is stopped and displayed in the form of During this time, the player hits to the right, a plurality of game balls pass through the start gate 20, the variable start prize winning device 28 is opened, and one game ball enters the right start prize opening 28b. . In this case, one second special symbol memory (marker M2) is accumulated.

Here, since the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is not subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times remains two times remaining.

(D) in FIG. 57: Since the memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are digested in the winning order, after this, the remaining three memories of the first special symbol are digested. Then, when the remaining memory of the first special symbol is consumed, an internal lottery is executed using the memory of the second special symbol. Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts, the drum unit 200 starts rotating accordingly, and the performance symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2 on the liquid crystal display 42 also start to vary. Here, in the internal lottery for the second special symbol, it is assumed that a small hit is won.

[Small hit start, 2nd big prize opening open]
(E) in FIG. 57: Then, when the second special symbol is stop-displayed in the form of a small win, the pseudo performance symbol of the drum unit 200 (combination of "cherry symbol" - "cherry symbol" - "cherry symbol"), The production pattern Hz (combination of "5"-"2"-"6") on the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth pattern Z2 (green display color) on the liquid crystal display 42 are also stop-displayed in a small winning mode. As a result, a small winning game is started, and the second big winning opening 31b is opened. Then, an effect is executed in which the car in which the female character is riding speeds up and advances to the right side of the screen. Also, for example, the player hits to the right during the variation of the second special symbol, the game ball passes through the start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28 opens, and one game ball hits the right start winning opening. Assume that the ball is entered at 28b. In this case, one second special symbol memory (marker M2) is accumulated.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the remaining number of times is displayed as one remaining time.

(F) in FIG. 57: When the small winning game is started, an effect is executed in which the hermit character utters the line "Aim for the lower right attacker." As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the game ball must enter the second variable winning device 31 .

[Pass through specific area]
(G) in FIG. 58: The second variable winning device 31 is shifted to the open state due to the small winning game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small winning is the sixth winning symbol. do. In this example, an effect is executed in which a female character riding in a car raises a heart mark with the letter V drawn on it and utters a line such as "You did it! It's a BIG BONUS!!". As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that a big hit game (BIG BONUS) is about to start.

[Small win ends, big win game starts]
(H) in FIG. 58: After that, the small winning game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning opening 31b) is closed. Also, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, the big winning game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and an effect is executed in which the female character utters similar lines. In addition, the display screen displays an arrow pointing to the right and text information such as ``Keep right-handed'', so that the player can be taught that the big win game will proceed with right-handed.

After that, the effect during the big win game similar to the above is started, and the big win game progresses. For example, if the winning pattern at the time of the small win regarding the 2nd special pattern corresponds to the 6th winning pattern, substantially 9 rounds worth of balls (10 rounds worth of balls including the small winning game) are obtained. can do. In addition, when the jackpot game is executed in the drive mode, it is possible to execute a special effect during the winning in the drive mode.

FIGS. 59 and 60 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects when the second special symbol changes in the drive mode in the non-time reduction state. Such a situation occurs mainly because the final variation of the time shortening state corresponds to the big hit of the "fourth winning symbol" or the small win of the "sixth winning symbol" and the big win game is executed, and the second 2 This is the case where the memory of the special design is accumulated.

Here, it is assumed that one memory of the second special symbol exists. For this reason, production|presentation in time saving is continuously performed. Further, as the remaining number of times display effect, information of "one remaining time" is displayed. However, the right hitting suggestion production is not executed.

[During display of special symbols]
(A) in FIG. 59: When the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-reduced time state, the drum unit 200 starts rotating along with it, and the effect symbol Hz and the number displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 are displayed. The 4 symbols Z2 also start to change.

[Continuation of variable display effect]
(B) in FIG. 59: The variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed in the drive mode in the non-shortening state. Further, along with this, the rotation of the drum unit 200 continues, and the effect pattern Hz and the fourth pattern Z2 on the liquid crystal display 42 also continue to fluctuate. In addition, since the situation here is not the time shortening state, even if the starting gate 20 is passed, the probability that the variable starting prize winning device 28 will be long open is low. Therefore, it is basically impossible to accumulate the memory of the second special symbol. Therefore, the drive mode in such a non-time-reduction state becomes a chance zone in which the second special symbol fluctuates once at maximum.

[Stop display effect]
(C) in FIG. 59: Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery for the second special symbol. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small win mode, the pseudo performance symbol of the drum unit 200 (combination of "cherry symbol" - "cherry symbol" - "cherry symbol") and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42. Hz (a combination of "2"-"2"-"3") and the fourth pattern Z2 (green display color) on the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a small win mode. In this case, an effect is executed in which the animal character holds up a "mark with the number 7 displayed".

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is 0 remaining times.

[Small hit start, 2nd big prize opening open]
(D) in FIG. 60: Then, when the small winning game is started, the second big winning opening 31b is opened, and the car in which the female character is riding speeds up and advances to the right side of the screen. executed. At this time, an effect is executed in which the animal character is left behind.

[Pass through specific area]
(E) in FIG. 60: The second variable winning device 31 is shifted to the open state due to the small winning game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small winning is the sixth winning symbol. do. In this example, an effect is executed in which a female character riding in a car raises a heart mark with the letter V drawn on it and utters a line such as "You did it! It's a BIG BONUS!!". As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that a big hit game (BIG BONUS) is about to start.

[Small win ends, big win game starts]
(F) in FIG. 60: After that, the small winning game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning opening 31b) is closed. Also, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, the big winning game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and an effect is executed in which the female character utters similar lines. In addition, the display screen displays an arrow pointing to the right and text information such as ``Keep right-handed'', so that the player can be taught that the big win game will proceed with right-handed. After that, the effect during the big win game similar to the above is started, and the big win game progresses. Then, when the jackpot game is executed in the drive mode in the non-time shortening state corresponding to the sixth winning symbol, the game shifts to the animal mode after the jackpot game ends.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an overview of drive modes.
The first example effect shows an example effect when a normal game is played, and the second example effect shows an example effect when an irregular game is played.

[First production example]
The state of (A) in FIG. 61 is a state in which there are two remaining drive modes (a state in which there is a possibility of a big win occurring at least two times remaining), and the game state of the main controller 70 is a time reduction state. be.
If the state of (A) in FIG. 61 corresponds to a time-saving hit, the state of (A) in FIG.
On the other hand, in the state of (A) in FIG. 61, when it corresponds to no time-saving hit and there is a memory of the second special symbol, the state of (B) in FIG. 61 is shifted to after the end of the jackpot game.

The state of (B) in FIG. 61 is a state in which there is one remaining drive mode (a state in which at least one remaining jackpot may occur), and the gaming state of the main controller 70 is a non-time reduction state. (memory digestion interval).
If the state of (B) in FIG. 61 corresponds to a time-saving hit, the state shifts to the state of (A) in FIG. 61 after the jackpot game ends.
On the other hand, if the state of (B) in FIG. 61 corresponds to no time-saving hit, the state shifts to the state of (C) in FIG. 61 after the end of the jackpot game.

The state of (C) in FIG. 61 is the animal mode, and the game state of the main controller 70 is the non-time reduction state (immediate stop prevention section). The animal mode ends after a specified number of fluctuations have passed, after which the mode shifts to the normal mode.

[Second production example]
The state of (D) in FIG. 61 is a state in which the drive mode has two remaining times, and the game state of the main controller 70 is a time reduction state.
If the state of (D) in FIG. 61 corresponds to no time-saving hit and there is no memory of the second special symbol, the state shifts to (E) in FIG. 61 after the end of the jackpot game.

The state of (E) in FIG. 61 is the animal mode, and the game state of the main controller 70 is the non-time reduction state (memory consumption period). However, in this state, since there is no memory of the second special symbol, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be digested, and eventually the memory of the first special symbol will be digested.

[Outline of drive mode]
The drive mode (continuous state) transitions as shown in (A) to (C) in FIG. 61 when a normal game is played.
If winning is won in the time reduction state without time reduction, the game state of the main control device becomes a memory consumption interval after the jackpot game. At this time, in this embodiment, if there is a memory of the second special symbol, a big hit (a big hit or a big hit via a small win) has a probability of 1/1. In addition, the upper limit of the storage of the second special symbol is one. Therefore, when there is a memory of the second special symbol, the drive mode effect is continued (it looks like continuous villas are continued; see (A) to (C) in FIG. 61).

When a normal game is played, since the second special symbol is stored at the time of the jackpot in the time shortening state, such a state transition occurs. If there is no memory of the pattern, the series of houses is practically finished there.

For this reason, in this embodiment, even if the game state of the main controller is in the memory digestion period, it is shifted to the animal mode that does not continue the continuous game (see (D) and (E) in FIG. 61).
Since whether or not the second special symbol is stored at the time of winning is also related to the big win performance, determination of whether or not the second special symbol is stored is made when receiving an opening command for a small win or a big win.

For this reason, if the winner is won without memory of the second special symbol and the memory of the second special symbol accumulates during the round of the jackpot game, the second special symbol is displayed in the memory consumption section after shifting to the animal mode. I am trying to change the special pattern.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the loss variation of the first special symbol is executed in the memory consumption section.
The first example of effect shows an example of effect in the case where the first special symbol is lost and changed in the memory consumption interval, but the second special symbol is stored.
The second example of effect shows an example of effect in the case where the loss variation of the first special symbol is executed in the memory consumption interval and the second special symbol is not stored.

[First production example]
The state of (A) in FIG. 62 is a state in which the drive mode has one remaining time, and the game state of the main controller 70 is a non-time reduction state (memory consumption period).
In the state of (A) in FIG. 62, when the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed, as shown in (B) in FIG. is executed, and as shown in (C) in FIG. 62, an effect that ultimately results in a failure (for example, an effect of failing to launch fireworks) is executed.

[Second production example]
The state of (D) in FIG. 62 is the animal mode, and the game state of the main controller 70 is the non-time-reduction state (memory consumption period). However, in this state, since there is no memory of the second special symbol, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be digested, and if the player hits left, the first special symbol will fluctuate.

In this case, during the execution of the deviation variation of the first special symbol, as shown in (E) in FIG. A production that results in a failure is executed. In a special pseudo-fluctuation effect, the fluctuation start action and the fluctuation stop action are executed multiple times according to the fluctuation time (variation scale).

In spite of the memory digestion section, when the visual effect is the animal mode, a variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, variation of several tens of seconds) is set for the variation of the first special symbol.
At this time, if the game is shifted to the drive mode and an out-of-game effect is performed there, consistency in appearance can be obtained, but since there is a relationship of "drive mode=running", the player may misunderstand.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is a memory digestion section and the visual effect is the animal mode, the lottery for executing the contents of the variable display effect is switched, and the start and stop of the change are varied. After repeating the length of time, by executing an effect that confirms in the mode of failure, there is no sense of incongruity in appearance.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the difference between the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected in the memory consumption period and the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected in the immediate stop prevention period.

As shown in (A) in FIG. 63, in the variation pattern selection table for the memory digestion section, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss, the variation pattern selected is a variation pattern for a long period of time. may be For example, a long-time variation variation pattern is a variation pattern having a variation time of 56.0 seconds.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), in the variation pattern selection table for the immediate stop prevention section, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost, the selected variation pattern is the first short-time variation There is a possibility that the fluctuation pattern of the ~3rd short-time fluctuation will be selected. For example, the variation pattern of the first short-term variation is a variation pattern having a variation time of 20.0 seconds, and the variation pattern of the second short-term variation is a variation pattern having a variation time of 13.5 seconds, The variation pattern of the third short-time variation is a variation pattern having a variation time of 6.0 seconds.

And, the loss variation of the first special symbol, which is the problem this time, is the long-time variation shown in FIG.
For this reason, when the game state is the memory digestion section and the apparent mode is the animal mode corresponding to the immediate stop prevention section, in order to match the effect, as described above, a special simulation is performed. Performing variable performance.

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the flow of the game regarding the game state and the shooting direction.
The following flow of the game is the flow of the game when the continuous villa state ends in the shortest time.
Specifically, in the non-time shortening state, the "first winning type (with time saving)" jackpot is won, and in the time shortening state, the "sixth winning type (without time saving)" jackpot is won, and the time is not shortened. This is the flow of the game when winning the "sixth winning type (no time reduction)" jackpot in the state.
The game state progresses in the order of No.1 to No.13.

[No.1]
The "game state" is "first special symbol variation", and the "shooting direction" is "left-handed".
At the start of the game, the first special symbol is varied to aim for a big hit.

[No.2]
The "game state" is "big win (first win, first big win)", and the "shooting direction" is "right hitting". Here, it is assumed that the jackpot of "first winning type (with short working hours)" is won.

[No.3]
The "game state" is "time reduction state", and the "shooting direction" is "right-handed".
When the game state shifts from the non-time shortening state to the time shortening state, the shooting direction is right-handed.

[No.4]
The "game state" is "first special symbol variation (short variation)", and the "shooting direction" is "right hitting". The memory of the first special symbol accumulated at the time of the first hit is quickly digested.

[No.5]
The "game state" is "second special symbol variation (time shortening state, memory +1)", and the "shooting direction" is "right hitting". During the variation of the second special symbol, one memory of the second special symbol can be accumulated.

[No.6]
The "game state" is "second special symbol stop (end of time shortening state)", and the "shooting direction" is "left-handed". When the second special symbol is stopped and the game state shifts from the time shortening state to the non-time shortening state, the shooting direction is switched from right hitting to left hitting.

[No.7]
The "game state" is "memory increase of the first special symbol", and the "shooting direction" is "left-handed". The memory of the 1st special design accumulates up to 4 pieces at maximum.

[No.8]
The "game state" is "big win via small win (second big win)", and the "shooting direction" is "right hitting". The shooting direction during the small winning game or the big winning game is right-handed. Here, it is assumed that a small hit of "sixth winning type (without time reduction)" is won.

[No.9]
The "game state" is "second special symbol variation (non-time reduction state)", and the "shooting direction" is "left-handed". Here, the storage of the second special symbol cannot be increased.

[No.10]
The "game state" is "memory increase of the first special symbol", and the "shooting direction" is "left-handed". The memory of the 1st special design accumulates up to 4 pieces at maximum.

[No.11]
The "game state" is "second special symbol stop", and the "shooting direction" is "left-handed". The firing direction remains left-handed.

[No.12]
The "game state" is "big win via small win (third big win)", and the "shooting direction" is "right hitting". The shooting direction during the small winning game or the big winning game is right-handed. Here, it is assumed that a small hit of "sixth winning type (without time reduction)" is won.

[No.13]
The "game state" is "completed one set (three times) of jackpots", and the "shooting direction" is "left-handed". In this case, it shifts to animal mode. In this way, when the winning pattern without time saving (for example, "sixth winning type (no time saving)") is applied twice in a row, the continuous state ends.

Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-mentioned variable display effect, reach effect, advance notice effect before the occurrence of reach, memory number display effect, big role effect, effect using liquid crystal display 42 and drum unit 200, time saving effect, right hand hitting effect, remaining number display effect, etc. are controlled through the following control process.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. As shown in FIG. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from reset start (main) process not shown, for example. The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a cycle of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

Production control processing includes command reception processing (step S400), working memory production management processing (step S401), production design management processing (step S402), other production processing during time reduction and pseudo time reduction (step S402a), and drum unit production management processing. (step S403), effect management processing during special fluctuation (step S403a), display output processing (step S404), lamp drive processing (step S406), sound drive processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and others (step S412) subroutine group. The basic flow of the effect control process will be described below along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control CPU 126 receives a command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Also, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 by type. It should be noted that the production commands transmitted from the main control CPU 72 include, for example, a special target determination production command, (special symbol) production command when the number of working memories increases, (special design) production command when the number of working memories decreases, start Winning sound control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop pattern command, pattern stop command, state designation command, round number command, firing position designation command, error notification command, jackpot There are end effect command, variation pattern destination judgment command, stop display time end command, number cutting counter command, various error commands, special variation number designation command, opening command at the time of big hit, opening command at the time of small win, etc.

Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls execution of the memory number display effect described above and the pre-reading preview effect using the marker M1. The contents of the operation memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, and controls the contents of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable It also controls the contents of the presentation when the winning device 31 is opened and closed. Also, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects effect patterns of various advance notice effects (before the occurrence of reach, notice effect after the occurrence of reach, etc.). Thus, in the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 42 (the effect symbol Hz, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, the markers M1 and M2, the effect contents related to the effect during the big role, various (contents of the advance notice effect) is executed. Note that the specific contents of the processing will be described later.

Step S402a: The effect control CPU 126 executes other effect processing during time saving and pseudo time saving. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining the contents of effects related to the right-hand hitting suggesting effect, the remaining count display effect, and the like. Note that the specific contents of the processing will be described later.

Step S403: In the drum unit effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes the process of controlling the drum unit 200 based on the effect content determined in the effect pattern management process. Thus, in the drum unit effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes the process of determining the effect content to be displayed on the drum unit 200 (the effect content related to the pseudo effect pattern, the content related to the movement of the drum unit 200). Note that the specific contents of the processing will be described later.

Step S403a: In the special fluctuation production management process, the production control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute the special fluctuation production based on the special fluctuation number designation command. A process for determining whether or not to execute the effect during special fluctuation is executed. In addition, you may perform this process in the production|presentation design change pre-process.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that executes a non-reach effect (for example, an effect that changes the effect pattern at high speed) when a special variation pattern for a short time (about several seconds) is selected. However, when a special variation pattern for a long time (about several tens of seconds) is selected, a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing a ready-to-win effect or the like is executed.

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 gives the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol , operating memory effect pattern number, pre-reading forewarning effect pattern number, fluctuation effect pattern number, fluctuation time forewarning effect number, background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146 and VDP 152) controls the display operation of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect contents (effect executing means).

Step S<b>406 : In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132 . In response to this, the lamp drive circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, and the like based on the control signal.

Step S408: In the next sound driving process, the effect control CPU 126 sends the effect contents (for example, during the variable display effect, during the reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the jackpot effect, BGM, voice data, etc.) to the sound drive circuit 134. instruct. As a result, the speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sounds corresponding to the content of the presentation.

Step S410: In effect random number update processing, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. FIG. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for advance notice selection, a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In other processes, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and performs effects in synchronization with image display by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.
In this process, the effect control CPU 126 may manage the effect of the drum unit 200 (process for controlling the drum unit 200).

Through the effect control processing described above, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1 . Next, the contents of the effect symbol management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory presentation management processing]
FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation storage effect management process. The contents will be described below according to the procedure example.

Step S700: First, the production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the production command for increasing the number of working memories is received from the main control CPU 72 . Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories is saved. When it is confirmed that the production command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S702. In addition, when it cannot be confirmed that the production command at the time of increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the production control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is increased. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect of displaying the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol or the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S704: The production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not it has received a production command from the main control CPU 72 when the number of working memories is reduced. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command is stored when the number of working memories is reduced. When it is confirmed that the production command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced (step S704: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S706. In addition, when it cannot be confirmed that the production command is saved when the number of working memories decreases (step S704: No), the production control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect selection processing when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes the effect of extinguishing the marker M1 or the marker M2 corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery, and moves the remaining markers M1 and M2 that are not consumed by the internal lottery to the left. Execute the slide effect.
After completing the above procedure, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 65).

[Production pattern management process]
FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of production symbol management processing. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and when the variable winning device is in operation. This configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). The basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described below along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variable display effect has not yet started, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process has been completed, the next As the jump destination of the production symbol stop display processing (step S506) is selected. Also, the variable winning device activation process (step S508) is selected as a jump destination only when the variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 18) is selected in the main control CPU72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation preprocessing, the effect control CPU 126 performs the work of adjusting the conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2. In addition, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the ready-to-win effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type (type of winning pattern), variation pattern, etc.) (pre-occurrence notice pattern, after-reach notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 126 also controls a demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information to instruct the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when an effect using the effect switching button 45 is performed during execution of a variable display effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the effect button is operated by the player, and the effect content (button effect) according to the result. to the display control CPU 146.

Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the stop display effect according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) actually terminates the variable display effect that has been executed so far in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronism with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (execution of the symbol effect). means).

Step S508: In the variable winning device activation process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect contents during the small winning game or the big winning. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the effect during the big role according to various conditions (for example, winning type). The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

[Production pattern change pre-processing]
Next, FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the above effect symbol variation pre-processing. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S600: The production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not it has received a demonstration production command from the main control CPU 72 . Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a command for demonstration effect is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demonstration effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes demonstration selection processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.
It should be noted that, as an effect representing the customer waiting state, it is also possible to display content to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as ``Let's be careful not to become addicted to the game''. By doing so, it is possible to easily execute an effect related to addiction prevention at an appropriate timing, and to reduce the disadvantage of the player.

After completing the above procedure, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control processing as it is, and controls the content of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the following display output process (step S404 in FIG. 65) and lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 65). do.

On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the demonstration effect command is not saved in step S600 (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the change this time is a loss (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. Conversely, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. It should be noted that it is also possible to confirm whether or not this time's variation is lost based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the lost normal variation or the lost reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a loss. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command designates a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a loss.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (lost) (step S604: No), then the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not this change is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. Conversely, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command for the big win is not stored (No), since only the lottery result command for the small win remains, the performance control CPU 126 executes step S608 in this case. It should be noted that it is also possible to confirm whether or not the current variation is a big hit based on the variation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is the big hit. Also, if the current stop symbol command corresponds to a big win symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a big win.

Step S608: The production control CPU 126 executes a small hit fluctuation production pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 . The production pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the production control CPU 126 can refer to a production pattern selection table (not shown) to select the production pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. can. Incidentally, the effect pattern number may be prepared in pairs with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

In addition, when the production pattern number is selected, the production control CPU 126 refers to the production table (not shown), and the production pattern Hz corresponding to the variable production pattern number at that time and the fluctuation schedule (variation time) of the fourth patterns Z1 and Z2, stop. Decide on the mode of display, etc.

For example, the effect control CPU 126 changes the effect pattern Hz and the fourth pattern Z2 in the state of "drive mode" when the second special pattern changes in the time shortening state, and finally the effect corresponding to the small win. A process of selecting an effect pattern for stop-displaying the symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2 is executed.
On the other hand, the effect control CPU 126 changes the effect pattern Hz and the fourth pattern Z2 in the state where the "drive mode" is continued or in the normal mode, for example, when the second special symbol changes in the small hit in the non-time shortening state. Finally, a process of selecting an effect pattern for stop-displaying the effect symbol Hz corresponding to the small hit and the fourth symbol Z2 is executed.

The above procedure is for the case of a "minor hit", but if it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a variation effect pattern selection process at the time of a big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 . It should be noted that, in the process of selecting the performance pattern at the time of a big hit, the process may be further branched for each stop symbol at the time of a big win.

In addition, in the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a deviation in step S604 (Yes), it then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a variation effect pattern selection process when losing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of loss based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 . The effect pattern number at the time of losing is classified into "normal loss fluctuation", "short time loss fluctuation", "loss reach fluctuation", etc. Further, a detailed reach fluctuation pattern is specified for "loss reach fluctuation". Which effect pattern number the effect control CPU 126 selects is determined based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72 .

When the performance pattern number at the time of losing is selected, the performance control CPU 126 refers to a performance table (not shown), and determines the variation schedule (variation time, reach Determines presence/absence of occurrence, reach type and reach occurrence timing in the case of reach occurrence, and mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.). It should be noted that the method of determining the effect at the time of losing is the same as at the time of the big hit.

After executing any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S614 next.

Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process (preview effect executing means). In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects by lottery the details of the advance notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or not winning) and the current internal state (normal state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is to notify the player of the possibility of the ready-to-win state occurring during the variable display effect, or to notify the player of the possibility of finally winning a big win or a small win. . Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set low when the game is not won, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set higher than when the game is not won in order to increase the player's expectation when the game is won.

Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes mode effect management processing (advantageous game state effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, the effect control CPU 126, in principle, when the internal state is the non-time reduction state, executes the process of selecting the background image corresponding to the normal mode, and when the internal state is the time reduction state, The process of selecting the background image corresponding to the drive mode (the process of selecting the effect during time saving) is executed.

However, the effect control CPU 126, as an exception, even if the internal state is the non-time shortening state, when the second special symbol is stored when the time shortening state is changed to the non-time shortening state. , a background image corresponding to the drive mode is selected (advantageous game state effect execution means, advantageous game state effect continuation execution means). Incidentally, such an exceptional process is executed in the effect symbol stop display process to be described later.

After completing the above procedure, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol fluctuation process (step S504 in FIG. 67), the variable display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variable effect pattern (symbol effect executing means), A notice effect is executed based on various notice effect patterns. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here.

[Processing for selecting variation effect pattern when losing]
FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the change effect pattern selection process at the time of failure. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S620: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current state is the memory consumption interval. The memory digestion section is a section for digesting the memory of the second special symbol in the non-reduced time state shifted after the end of the time shortened state. The memory consumption interval is, for example, the first variation interval of the second special symbol and the first to fourth variation intervals of the first special symbol after the end of the jackpot game. After the end of the memory digestion interval, an immediate stop prevention interval for the animal mode is set.

The memory consumption section and the immediate stop prevention section may be managed only by the main control device, may be managed only by the performance control device, or may be managed by both devices. For example, a memory digest segment can be managed by a memory digest segment stay flag. The memory consumption interval stay flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game, and after the jackpot game ends, when the first variation interval of the second special symbol ends, or when the fifth variation interval of the first special symbol Set to OFF when starting. On the other hand, the immediate stop prevention section is set to ON at the timing when the memorized digested section stay flag is set from ON to OFF, and when the immediate stop prevention section is set to ON, the specified number of special pattern variations are completed. set to OFF.

If you are playing normally (if you continue to hit right in the time shortened state), you will digest the memory of the second special symbol in the memory digestion section, but if you are not playing normally ( If you do not continue to hit right in the time shortened state), it is possible to digest the memory of the first special symbol in the memory digestion section.

As a result, if it is confirmed that the current state is the memory consumption interval (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S621, and if it cannot be confirmed that the current state is the memory consumption interval (No), the effect Control CPU 126 executes step S625.

Step S621: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current variation is the variation of the first special symbol.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation is the variation of the first special symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S622 and cannot confirm that the variation of this time is the variation of the first special symbol. In the case (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S625.

Step S622: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the second special symbol is stored.

As a result, if it is confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S623, and if it cannot be confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (No), that is, the second When confirming that there is a memory for the 2 special symbols, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S624.

Step S623: The production control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting a special pseudo-fluctuation production. The special pseudo-fluctuation effect is an effect in which the fluctuation start action and the fluctuation stop action are executed multiple times according to the fluctuation time.

Step S624: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the out-of-reach effect. The effect control CPU 126 executes, for example, an effect as to whether or not the launching of fireworks is successful, and finally selects the effect of failing to launch the fireworks.

Step S625: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a losing effect according to the stay mode and the variation pattern. The effect control CPU 126 selects, for example, a simple losing effect, or selects a losing effect by executing a ready-to-win effect.
When the above processing is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 68).

[Mode production management processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of mode effect management processing. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S630: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current game state is the time reduction state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current game state is the time reduction state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S634, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current game state is the time reduction state (No) , the effect control CPU 126 executes step S631.

Step S631: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current state is the memory consumption interval.

As a result, if it is confirmed that the current state is the memory consumption interval (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S632, and if it cannot be confirmed that the current state is the memory consumption interval (No), the effect The control CPU 126 executes step S633.

Step S632: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the second special symbol is stored.

As a result, if it is confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S635, and if it cannot be confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (No), that is, the second When confirming that there is a memory for the 2 special symbols, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S634.

Step S633: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the change is within a specified number of times (for example, within 15 times) after the big hit game.

As a result, if it is confirmed that the variation is within the specified number of times after the big hit game (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S635, and if it cannot be confirmed that the variation is within the specified number of times after the big hit game ( No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S636.

Step S634: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting a background image for the drive mode.

Step S635: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting a background image for the animal mode.

Step S636: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting a background image for normal mode.
When the above processing is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 68).

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126, if there is a memory of the second special symbol (if the state of the lottery element storage means is a special state, the state of the memory of the lottery element is a special state ), it is possible to execute a drive mode production (common production) with common contents in the non-time reduction state (first state, normal state) and the time reduction state (second state, advantageous state) (production means of execution).

In addition, by executing such processing, the effect control CPU 126, if there is no storage of the second special symbol (if the state of the lottery element storage means is not in a special state, the state of storage of the lottery element is in a special state). state), non-reduced time state (first state, normal state) and time-reduced state (second state, advantageous state), drive mode production (non-common production) and animal mode production (non common effect) can be executed (effect executing means).

[Production pattern stop display process]
FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the effect symbol stop display process. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S650: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is during time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command. The internal state can also be confirmed by a variation pattern command (the same applies hereinafter).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S652, and when it is not possible to confirm that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect control CPU 126 steps Execute S656.

Step S652: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not it is the time saving final variation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms the number cutting counter command, thereby confirming whether or not it is the time saving final variation. For example, if it is a change when the first cut counter value or the second cut counter value switches from "1" to "0", the effect control CPU 126 can determine that it is the time saving final fluctuation.

As a result, when it is confirmed that it is the time saving final variation (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S654, and when it cannot be confirmed that it is the time saving final change (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666. .

Step S654: The production control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the number of second special symbols to be stored in the pseudo time saving counter. The pseudo time-saving counter is stored in the RAM 130. For example, when the number of stored second special symbols is "0", the pseudo time-saving counter is set to "0", and the number of stored second special symbols is "1". ", "1" is set to the pseudo time saving counter.
After completing this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666.

Step S656: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the staying background is the normal background, that is, whether or not the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 is the background image corresponding to the normal mode.

As a result, if it is confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666, and if it cannot be confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (No), the effect control CPU 126 steps Execute S658.

Step S658: The production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the value of the simulated time saving counter is greater than zero.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the pseudo time-saving counter is a value greater than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S660 and confirms that the value of the pseudo time-saving counter is a value greater than 0. If it cannot be confirmed (No), that is, if the value of the pseudo time saving counter is 0, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S664.

Step S660: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the stay background to the simulated time saving background. The pseudo time-saving background is the background of the drive mode in which the right-handed display is not displayed.

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU126, even when the time shortening state (advantageous gaming state) ends and transitions to a non-time shortening state (predetermined gaming state), the pseudo time saving counter When the value is greater than 0 (when a special condition is satisfied), the production during time reduction (advantageous game state production) can be continuously executed (advantageous game state production continuous execution means). .

Step S662: The production control CPU 126 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the simulated time saving counter.

Step S664: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the stay background to the normal background. The normal background is the normal mode background.

Step S666: The effect control CPU 126 executes other processes. In the other processing, as described above, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect in a mode according to the result of the internal lottery.

Then, after finishing the above process, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 67).

[Processing when variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of processing when the variable winning device is activated. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the result of this variation was a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the lottery result command, and confirms whether it corresponds to the big win or the small win. As a result of this confirmation, if the result of this variation is a big hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S802. On the other hand, if the result of this variation is not a big hit (No), that is, if it is a small hit, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S804.

Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 executes the processing when the variable winning device is activated at the time of the big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the big win game to the end of the big win game.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 stores various image data related to the effect pattern at the time of the big hit, which is stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152), as the effect during the big win to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. A reading process is executed according to the winning pattern.

Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit time variable winning device activation process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the small win to the end of the small win.

Specifically, the performance control CPU 126 selects a performance pattern (for example, a performance in which a car in which a female character is riding speeds up) indicating that a small winning game has started at the start of a small winning game, and suggests hitting to the right. If the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, the effect pattern when passing the specific area (a female character riding a car displays a heart mark with a letter V Execute the process of selecting the production listed).

After completing the above procedure, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 67).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated at the time of the big hit]
FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the variable winning device activation process at the time of a big hit. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S810: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for confirming whether or not an opening command at the time of the big hit is received.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the opening command at the time of the big hit is received (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S811, and when it cannot be confirmed that the opening command at the time of the big win is received (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device activation process (FIG. 72).

Step S811: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the second special symbol is stored.

As a result, if it is confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S812, and if it cannot be confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (No), that is, the second When confirming that there is a memory for the 2 special symbols, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S814.

Step S812: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the big hit this time is a winning symbol that shifts to the time reduction state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current big win is a winning pattern that shifts to the time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S814, and confirms that the current big win is a winning pattern that shifts to the time shortening state. cannot be confirmed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S813.

Step S813: The production control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting a big hit production from the first selection table. The jackpot effects included in the first selection table are jackpot effects that do not include fireworks effects (effects suggesting transition to the drive mode).

Step S814: The production control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting a big hit production from the second selection table. The jackpot effects included in the second selection table are jackpot effects including fireworks effects.
When the above processing is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 68).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated at the time of a small hit]
FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the small hit variable winning device activation process. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S820: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for confirming whether or not an opening command at the time of a small hit is received.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the opening command at the time of the small hit is received (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S821, and when it cannot be confirmed that the opening command at the time of the small win is received (No), the effect The control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device activation process (FIG. 72).

Step S821: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the second special symbol is stored.

As a result, if it is confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S822, and if it cannot be confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (No), that is, the second When confirming that there is a memory for the 2 special symbols, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S824.

Step S822: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current small win is a winning symbol leading to a big win that shifts to the time shortening state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current small win is a winning pattern that leads to a big win that shifts to the time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S824, and the current small win shifts to the time shortening state. If it cannot be confirmed that the symbol is a winning symbol leading to a big hit (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S823.

Step S823: The production control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting a big hit production from the third selection table. The small-hit performance included in the third selection table is a small-hit performance that does not include a performance suggesting transition to the drive mode.

Step S824: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a big hit effect from the fourth selection table. The small-hit performance included in the fourth selection table is a small-hit performance including a performance suggesting transition to the drive mode.
When the above processing is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 68).

[During time saving and pseudo time saving and other production processing]
FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of production processing during time saving and pseudo time saving. An example procedure will be described below.

Here, during time saving (time saving) is a time saving state, and pseudo time saving (pseudo time saving) is a state in which a background image during time saving is displayed in a non-time saving state (in a non-time saving state drive mode).

Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is during time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes steps S852 and S854, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), effect control CPU 126 executes step S856.

Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 executes remaining number display processing based on the number of remaining time reductions. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the number-of-times counter command, and selects an effect pattern in which the value obtained by adding "1" to the second number-of-times counter value is displayed as the remaining number of times. Execute the processing to be performed. As a result, during the time saving, the value of "two remaining times" or "one remaining time" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number of times display effect.

Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 executes a right-hand hitting suggestion effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the right-handed suggestive effect on the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 .

Step S855: The effect control CPU 126 executes right-handed emphasis effect selection processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126, when it is necessary to execute a right-handed emphasis effect, for example, when the player continues to hit left-handed despite the transition to the time shortening state (particularly, 5th variation or 10th variation of the first special symbol), a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to an effect emphasizing hitting to the right on the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 is executed.

Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is during pseudo time saving. Effect control CPU126, when the value of the pseudo time saving counter is a value larger than 0, it can be determined that it is during the pseudo time saving.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time saving (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S858, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time saving (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 65).

Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes remaining number display processing based on the pseudo time saving counter. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern in which the value of the pseudo time saving counter is displayed as the remaining number of times. As a result, during the simulated time saving, the value of “one remaining time (last)” is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number of times display effect.

After finishing the above process, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 65).

[Drum Unit Performance Management Processing]
FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of drum unit performance management processing. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S900: The effect control CPU 126 executes movable body operation schedule determination processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 controls the operation schedule (fluctuation mode, stop mode, etc.) of the drum unit 200 based on the effect pattern (effect pattern number, etc.) determined by the effect symbol management process (step S402 in FIG. 65). perform a process to determine

When the operation schedule is determined, the effect control CPU 126 stores the determined operation schedule in the operation schedule storage buffer of the RAM 130 . When the operation schedule is determined, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of turning on the drum unit in-operation flag of the RAM 130, and executes a process of turning off the drum unit in-operation flag when all the determined schedules are executed. .

The operation schedule is set for each reel (each movable body). For example, in the case of the left reel 201, "acceleration"→"constant speed"→"deceleration"→"stop" in order from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation. etc. Among these, "acceleration" and "deceleration" have multiple speed changes, and "constant speed" may have multiple speed changes (for example, "low speed constant speed", "medium speed, etc." high speed”, “high speed constant speed”, etc.).

In this embodiment, a plurality of speeds (for example, about 100 kinds of speeds) are prepared for the set speed of the motor (reel), and various setting information (the number of steps of the motor) is stored in a plurality of movable body data tables (not shown). , motor set speed, time required for motor operation, motor excitation method, phase designation information for designating the phase to be excited by the motor, etc.). Each movable body data table stores different setting information.

Based on the operation schedule of the drum unit (movable unit) 200, the effect control CPU 126 determines in what order and at what timing which movable object data table should be referred to. The movable body data stored in the movable body data table being referred to is transmitted to the driver (IC) of the drum unit 200 by being stored in a movable body data setting area (not shown). A driver of the drum unit 200 drives each reel based on the movable body data.

The effect control CPU 126 basically overwrites the movable body data setting area with new movable body data (switches the movable body data table being referred to) when changing the speed of each reel. Even when the speed of each reel is maintained, new movable body data may be overwritten in the movable body data setting area (the movable body data table being referred to may not be switched).

This is because, in the case of maintaining a constant speed, if the number of movable body data tables corresponding to the number of seconds of special symbol variation is prepared, the number of movable body data tables corresponding to the number of seconds of special symbol variation will be generated. This is because it becomes necessary and the capacity of the movable body data table increases.

The operation schedule of the drum unit 200 corresponding to the production pattern is as follows.
For example, if the effect pattern is a effect pattern corresponding to the non-reach out effect, the effect control CPU 126 starts rotating the left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 at the start of fluctuation, and after a predetermined time elapses, the left reel 201 is stopped, then the right reel 203 is stopped, and finally the middle reel 202 is stopped. It should be noted that the stop stitch can be an arbitrary losing stitch or a losing stitch corresponding to the stop stitch of the performance symbol Hz.

On the other hand, if the production pattern is a production pattern corresponding to the ready-to-win production (big win fluctuation, small win fluctuation, loss fluctuation), the production control CPU 126 starts rotating the left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 at the start of the fluctuation. Then, after a predetermined time has passed, the left reel 201 is stopped, then the right reel 203 is stopped, a reach state is generated, and finally the middle reel 202 is stopped. The stop eyes correspond to the stop eyes of the production pattern Hz (the winning eyes of the same color 7 symbols corresponding to the big hit, the winning eyes of the cherry symbol corresponding to the small win, and the losing eyes) It can be a misalignment of the middle reel 202 by one frame.

In any case, the effect control CPU 126 determines the operation schedule of the drum unit 200 based on the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern management process in the movable body operation schedule determination process, and produces an effect based on the determined operation schedule. The contents and order of the movable body data table to be referred to (deceleration sequence, deceleration sequence with added control code, acceleration sequence, drive start sequence, drive stop sequence, etc.) are determined.

Step S902: The effect control CPU 126 executes movable body data setting start processing. This process is executed only when the setting of the movable body data is started during execution of the effect, that is, when the movable body data is overwritten.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 overwrites the movable body data in the movable body data table currently being referred to with the movable body data in the movable body data table to be referred to next. It executes the process of storing the movable body data stored in the scheduled movable body data table in the movable body data setting area, and determines whether or not it is the end of the movable body data (the next movable body to be referenced). Confirm whether or not the data table exists), and execute the process of storing the movable body data stored in the movable body data table in the movable body data setting area until it is determined that the end of the movable body data is reached. Execute the processing to be performed.
After completing the above processing, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 65).

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a transition example of a special variation pattern for countermeasures for immediate termination of continuous villa state.
(A) in the figure shows a transition example of the special variation pattern when the game is played without following the transition of the shooting direction.
For example, when the time shortening state ends and shifts to a non-time shortening state, and the memory of the second special symbol is digested in the non-time shortening state (during the left-handed state), one special symbol is stored. When a small win or a big win is achieved by memorizing the second special symbol, and the time is changed to a shortened state at the end of the big win game, that is, when the second special symbol is memorized and digested, the shooting of the game ball is stopped. In this case, the transition of the special variation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game" is the "first fluctuation", the "variation pattern table D (second special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table". In addition, the table selected here may be "fluctuation pattern table E (second special symbol)".
Specifically, the first variation after the end of the jackpot game is the variation of the second special symbol after the memory digestion of the second special symbol (variation time is 120 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, a reach variation (ready-to-win effect) exclusively for the second special symbol can be executed.

(B) in the figure shows a transition example of the special variation pattern when the game is played according to the transition of the shooting direction.
For example, when the time shortening state ends and shifts to a non-time shortening state, and the memory of the second special symbol is digested in the non-time shortening state (during the left-handed state), four special symbols are stored. When a small win or a big win is achieved by memorizing the second special symbol, and the state of time shortening occurs at the end of the big win game, that is, when the second special symbol is memorized and digested, the first special symbol is played by striking to the left. When four memories are stored, the transition of the special variation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game" is "1st to 4th fluctuations", the "special fluctuation table" is selected as "variation pattern table D (first special symbol)".
Specifically, the 1st to 4th variations after the end of the big hit game are the variations of the 1st special symbol after the memory digestion of the 2nd special symbol (variation time is about 90 to 120 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, reach variation dedicated to the first special symbol can be executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game" is the "5th fluctuation", the "variation pattern table D (second special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table". In addition, the table selected here may be "fluctuation pattern table E (second special symbol)".
Specifically, the fifth variation after the end of the jackpot game is the variation of the second special symbol after the second special symbol is stored (the variation time is 120 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, it is possible to execute a reach variation dedicated to the second special symbol.
By executing the stroke shown in (B) in the figure, it is possible to avoid the immediate termination of the consecutive villa state (situation in which the consecutive villa state ends immediately).

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a transition example of a special variation pattern considering irregular hitting.
(A) in the figure shows an example of transition of the special variation pattern when the game is played according to the shooting direction.
For example, in a state in which four first special symbols are stored before the first hit, when the player continues to hit to the right in a time-reduced state after the end of the jackpot game, that is, all the memories of the first special symbols are consumed, and the first special symbol is stored. When 2 special symbols are stored, the transition of the special variation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game" is "1st to 4th fluctuations", the "special fluctuation table" is selected as the "variation pattern table C (first special symbol)".
Specifically, the 1st to 4th variations after the end of the jackpot game are short variations (variation time is 1.0 seconds) for digesting the remaining memory of the first special symbol after the first hit. The liquid crystal display device 42 can, for example, change the effect symbols at high speed. In this case, the ready-to-win effect is not executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game" is the "5th fluctuation", the "variation pattern table C (second special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the 5th variation after the end of the jackpot game (the 1st variation of the second special symbol after the first hit) is a long variation (variation time is 120 seconds).

(B) in the figure shows a transition example of the special variation pattern when the game is played without following the shooting direction.
For example, in a state in which four first special symbols are stored before the first hit, and in spite of the time being shortened after the end of the jackpot game, while the player is hitting to the right, the player continues to hit to the left, that is, the first game. When the memory of the special symbols is completely consumed and the memory of the first special symbol continues to be accumulated and the time shortening state ends (puncture), the transition of the special variation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game" is "1st to 4th fluctuations", the "special fluctuation table" is selected as the "variation pattern table C (first special symbol)".
Specifically, the 1st to 4th variations after the end of the jackpot game are short variations (variation time is 1.0 seconds) for digesting the remaining memory of the first special symbol after the first hit. The liquid crystal display device 42 can, for example, change the effect symbols at high speed. In this case, the ready-to-win effect is not executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game" is the "5th fluctuation", the "variation pattern table G (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the fifth variation of the first special symbol after the first hit is a long variation (variation time is 13.5 seconds). For example, the liquid crystal display 42 can execute an effect (effect of prompting right-handed hitting) to prompt the variable starting prize winning device 28 (electric chew) to win a game ball (first time).

When the "number of variations after the end of the jackpot game" is "6th to 9th variations", the "variation pattern table C (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the 6th to 9th variations after the end of the jackpot game are short variations (variation time is 1.0 seconds) for digesting the remaining memory to which the first special symbol is added after the first hit. . The liquid crystal display device 42 can, for example, change the effect symbols at high speed. In this case, the ready-to-win effect is not executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game" is the "10th fluctuation", the "variation pattern table G (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the tenth variation of the first special symbol after the first hit is a long variation (variation time is 13.5 seconds). On the liquid crystal display 42, for example, it is possible to execute an effect (effect of prompting right-handed hitting) to prompt the variable starting prize winning device 28 (electric chew) to win a game ball (second time).

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game" is the "11th fluctuation", the "variation pattern table A (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the 11th variation of the first special symbol after the first hit is a variation based on the variation pattern included in the variation pattern table A. In addition, after the end of the time saving (puncture), it shifts to the normal state (non-time saving state, normal mode).

As described above, according to this embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, if there is a memory of the second special symbol (if the state of memory of the lottery element is a special state), a non-time-reducing state (normal state) and a time-reducing state (advantageous state), so that even if the game state changes from the time-reduction state to the non-time-reduction state, the time-reduction state is not displayed to the player. It can give the impression of continuity. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

(2) According to the present embodiment, a drive mode effect (common effect) or an animal mode effect (non-common effect) is executed depending on the state of memory. The player who is in the game can be motivated to accumulate memories. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

(3) In this embodiment, in the time shortening state, a configuration is adopted in which only one second special symbol can be stored. Then, the memory of the second special symbol becomes a small hit or more (a small hit or a big hit). For this reason, when the time shortening state is shifted to the non-time shortening state, there is only one variation for digesting the memory of the second special pattern, and the mode (stage) in the production at this time is the same as the time shortening state. Become (drive mode production).

〔problem〕
During the transition to the time shortening state, it becomes a section for accumulating the memory of the second special design, and if the memory of the second special design cannot be accumulated in this section, the game state of the main control device is as follows. Although it becomes a memory digestion section of the second special pattern, since the memory of the second special pattern cannot be digested, if a mode on performance is selected one-to-one with the game state, the performance will not hold.

Therefore, in this embodiment, not only the game state of the main control device but also the memory-related information (suspension information) is taken into account, thereby realizing a state transition that does not cause a sense of incongruity even in the irregular state.
Specifically, when receiving an opening command for a small win with no time saving or a big win in the time shortening state, subsequent development is branched depending on whether or not the second special symbol is stored. More specifically, when there is a memory of the second special symbol, a big role production (big hit production including firework production) is executed, and the drive mode (continuous villa state mode) is entered. On the other hand, when there is no memory of the second special symbol, a big role performance (big hit performance not including fireworks performance) is executed to end the series of villas, and the game is shifted to the animal mode (the end mode of the series of villas). In addition, when the memory of the second special pattern occurs after receiving the opening command, after transitioning to the animal mode (end mode), the change of the second special pattern of the memory digestion section is started (in the animal mode small or big hits occur).

By adopting such control contents, it is possible to shift the mode (stage) in consideration of not only the game state of the main control device but also the number of memories, and the special consecutive game specifications of this embodiment can be played. It can be easily understood by people.

The present invention can be modified in various ways without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of presentation given in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the mode of presentation described above.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a so-called 1-type and 2-type mixed machine has been described, but the present invention may be applied to a so-called 1-type gaming machine (a gaming machine that does not have a specific area).
In addition, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine with a probability variation function. It can also be applied to a game machine of ST type (a type that sets a substantial upper limit to the number of probability variations).
Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine having a variable probability region, and can also be applied to a gaming machine having no variable probability region.
Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that does not adopt "simultaneous spinning of the first special symbol and the second special symbol", and can also be applied to a gaming machine that employs simultaneous spinning. .

In the above-described embodiment, an example of a game machine including the drum unit 200 has been described, but a game machine without the drum unit 200 may be used.
Further, the drum unit 200 may be changed to a 7-segment display (for example, a device having a plurality of 7-segment displays, a 7-segment display for displaying production patterns) or a liquid crystal display.

The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines with settings.
The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine equipped with a performance display monitor.

In the above-described embodiment, the state with memory of the second special symbol is a special state, and the state with no memory of the second special symbol is not a special state, but the state with no memory of the second special symbol is special. state, and the state in which the second special symbol is stored may not be the special state.

In the above-described embodiment, the state with memory of the second special symbol is a special state, and the state with no memory of the second special symbol is not a special state. A certain state may be defined as a special state, and a state in which the number of second special symbols stored is less than the specified number may be defined as a non-special state.

In the above-described embodiment, the state with memory of the second special symbol is a special state, and the state with no memory of the second special symbol is not a special state, but the state with memory of the first special symbol is special. state, and the state in which there is no memory of the first special symbol may be regarded as not a special state. Also, the state in which the number of memory of the first special symbols is equal to or greater than the specified number may be defined as a special state, and the state in which the number of memory of the first special symbols is less than the specified number may be defined as not being a special state. Furthermore, the state in which the memory of the total of the first special design and the second special design is equal to or more than the specified number is a special state, and the state in which the memory of the total of the first special design and the second special design is less than the specified number is special. It may not be in a good state.

The following modifications are also possible for the embodiment described above.
(1) Depending on whether or not the first special symbol is stored, the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol may be changed.
For example, when there is a memory of the first special symbol, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, refer to a variation pattern selection table that can select a variation pattern for a long time (several tens of seconds to several minutes) .
On the other hand, when there is no memory of the first special symbol, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a variation pattern selection table that allows selection of a short-time (several seconds) variation pattern is referred to.

(2) A state (left-handed state) of accumulating the memory of the first special symbol may be generated during consecutive games (time shortening state, drive mode).
For example, the ending time of a jackpot is left-handed. That is, from the opening of the jackpot game to the end of the final round, the player is in the right-handed state, and only during the ending of the jackpot game is in the left-handed state.
Also, during the determination time of the small hit variation (from the start to the end of the stop display time), it will be in a left-handed state. The time shortening state can be turned off at the start of the fixed time of the small hit variation, thereby being in the non-time shortened state during the fixed time of the small hit variation.
In addition, "big hit fluctuation confirmation time (about 1 second, 0.5 seconds to several seconds) ≒ loss fluctuation confirmation time (about 1 second, 0.5 seconds to several seconds) < small hit fluctuation confirmation time (about 15 seconds, several seconds about 10 seconds)". In this case, the settlement time of the small hit variation is longer than that of the big hit or loss, so that the time of the non-time reduction state can be ensured for a long time.

(3) Definitions of "left-handed state" and "right-handed state" can be made as follows.
The main controller has an area for storing left-handed or right-handed states (for example, an area for storing a firing position designation flag). If the contents of memory are not a value indicating left-handed, it is "right-handed". The "left-handed state" is a non-time-shortening state (a state in which electric chewing support is not performed) or during the ending of a jackpot game. The other states are "right-handed states."

The main controller transmits a command for transmitting the state of the current firing position to the effect control device depending on whether it is a left-handed state or a right-handed state. Such commands may send a command indicating a left-handed state "on power up" and "on switching from a right-handed state to a left-handed state", and periodically during the left-handed state command can be sent.

During the left-handed state, the effect control device can turn off the right-handed information lamp based on the command from the main control device. In addition, during the left-handed state, the effect control device can hide the right-handed instruction display displayed on the liquid crystal display. Furthermore, during the left-handed state, the effect control device detects the passage of the game ball with a sensor in the right-handed area (gate switch 76 of the starting gate 20, etc.), the effect that prompts left-handed, for example, "left-handed Please return to" can be displayed and voice output can be executed. However, after the time shortening state ends, it is possible to prevent such effects from being executed until a predetermined number of changes are made in consideration of the remaining balls on the board (that is, a predetermined number of changes are made Until then, the right-handed notification lamp and the launch position designation display lamp are turned off, the right-handed instruction display (guidance information that encourages "right-handed") is hidden, and the execution of the effect that encourages left-handed is restricted. ).

The memory of the first special pattern can be stored regularly by making the left-handed state during the ending of the big win or during the fixed time of the fluctuation of the small prize, thereby allowing the fluctuation of the second special pattern during the continuous game. can be longer. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from declining due to an extremely short period of time in which the continuous residence state ends. On the other hand, if the left hand stroke is not made during consecutive games, the second special symbol will be in a state of short fluctuation, so the player can quickly digest the consecutive games.

Since the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine having the game characteristics of a one-type two-type mixed machine, winning while the variable start-up winning device 28 (ordinary electric accessory) is open in the non-shortening state is regarded as an error. It is also possible to make a decision and issue an error notification.

The following modifications are also possible for the embodiment described above.
(1) About external information If there is an external information signal (for example, "jackpot 4" among "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 5") that is output during the jackpot and during time saving, the following control is performed. Content can be applied.
(a) When the "jackpot game state" is shifted to the "normal state", if the memory number of the second special symbols is 0, the signal output of "jackpot 4" is turned ON after the end time of the jackpot game. may be turned OFF.
(b) When the "jackpot game state" is shifted to the "normal state", if the number of stored second special symbols is 1 or more, the signal output of "jackpot 4" is output even after the ending time of the jackpot game. may remain ON. In addition, when the memory of the second special symbol contains a losing variation (a lottery element for non-winning), the signal output of "big win 4" is maintained until the losing variation of the second special symbol is digested. The signal output of "jackpot 4" may be turned OFF after the loss variation of the 2 special symbols is digested (after the variation is completed).

(2) About special variation In the above-described embodiment, the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern table E (no time saving) was described with an example in which a variation time of 120 seconds is set in the case of the second special symbol. The first special symbol may also be controlled to select a long-time variation pattern (for example, a variation time of 320 seconds or more, or a variation time of over 100 seconds).
For the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern table B (no time reduction, immediate stop prevention section), in the case of the first special pattern, a variation pattern with a short variation time such as 13 seconds, 6 seconds (variation time of about several seconds) may be selected.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, the first state is the normal state, and the second state is the time reduction state. It may be another state, for example, the first state may be the latent state (high probability non-time reduction state), the second state may be the time reduction state (low probability time reduction state), and the first The state may be a reduced time state and the second state may be a latent state.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the common effect is executed when the second special symbol is stored has been described. Information (predetermined big hit, predetermined small hit, etc.) is executed on the condition that the common effect is executed, and the information stored in the second special symbol is not specific information (predetermined loss, second 2, the common effect may not be executed under the condition that all of the memory of the special symbols are lost, etc.).

(5) In the above-described embodiment, an example of executing a common effect when there is a memory of the second special symbol has been described, but depending on the gaming machine (model configuration), common when there is no memory of the second special symbol A configuration may be adopted in which the production is executed and the common production is not executed when the second special symbol is stored.

The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and can be appropriately modified. Also, the structure, board configuration, and specific numerical values of the pachinko machine 1, including those shown in the drawings, are preferred examples, and these can be modified as appropriate.

1 pachinko machine 8 game board unit 8a game area 20 starting gate 28 variable starting winning device 33 normal symbol display device 33a normal symbol working memory lamp 34 first special symbol display device 35 second special symbol display device 34a first special symbol working memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROMs
76 RAM
124 effect control device 126 effect control CPU
200 drum unit

Claims (1)

lottery element acquisition means for acquiring lottery elements related to a predetermined lottery;
lottery element storage means capable of storing the lottery elements;
lottery execution means for executing the predetermined lottery using the lottery element;
special game execution means for executing a special game when the predetermined lottery is won;
state transition means for enabling transition from the first state to the second state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied;
and a production execution means that enables execution of production ,
The production executing means is
If the state of the lottery element storage means is a special state, a common effect can be executed in the first state and the second state ,
If the state of the lottery element storage means is not the special state, a non-common effect can be executed in the first state and the second state,
Even if the state of the lottery element storage means is the special state, the state of the lottery element storage means is not the special state at the start of the special game, and the lottery element after the start of the special game. The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the state of the storage means becomes the special state, the non-common presentation can be executed in the first state and the second state.

Images